Tafsir LabMethodGitHubTürkçe

33. Sūrat al-Aḥzāb

The Qurʾān · Sūra 33: al-Aḥzāb · 73 verses · 48 sections

This commentary was written by Claude (Anthropic); it carries no religious authority and should be checked against the classical sources.

Jump to a verse

73 verses. Medinan. It takes its name from the word ٱلْأَحْزَاب (al-aḥzāb) that occurs in verses 20 and 22: "confederated groups, companies come together".

This sūra is one of the densest and most misunderstood texts in the Qurʾān. Dense, because things that look very far apart stand side by side in a single sūra: a scene of siege, a regulation about adoption, a code of conduct for a household, a trust the heavens shrank from carrying. Misunderstood, because some of its verses, cut loose from their context, have become the material of quite different arguments.

The method to be followed in this commentary is this: to read the sūra by its own internal logic. And that logic stands in the first sentence of the fourth verse:

مَّا جَعَلَ ٱللَّهُ لِرَجُلٍ مِّن قَلْبَيْنِ فِى جَوْفِهِۦ"God has not made two hearts inside any man." (33/4)

This sentence is not giving a piece of anatomy. It lays down a principle, and the rest of the sūra consists largely of applications of that principle: changing the name of a thing does not change its reality.

  • Saying to a wife "you are my mother" does not make her a mother (4).
  • Calling a child "my son" does not make him a son by birth (4-5).
  • Saying at the moment of a siege "our houses are exposed" does not turn flight into a legitimate excuse (13).
  • Saying "we have believed" does not change where the heart is looking in the moment of danger (12-19).
  • And from the other side: just as a man's being called Zayd b. Muḥammad did not really make him a son, so the consequences of that are put right not by a name but by an act (37, 40).

From beginning to end the sūra measures the distance between a name and a reality. I record this as my own reading; but its ground is the text itself: the sentence ذَٰلِكُمْ قَوْلُكُم بِأَفْوَٰهِكُمْ ("that is your saying with your mouths") in the fourth verse is a key to the reading, placed at the head of the sūra.

The name of the sūra

The root analysis of the word ḥizb was made at al-Mujādala (58/19 and 58/22, ḥizb al-shayṭān / ḥizb Allāh). I do not repeat here what was recorded there; I add to it.

What was established there is this: the root ح-ز-ب carries both the sense "a community gathered around a purpose" and the sense "the pressing of an affair", and what joins the two senses is this: people gather around a shared distress. A ḥizb is not a blood tie; it is a chosen belonging.

The name of this sūra is the plural of that word: al-Aḥzāb — "the groups". And there is a nicety worth noting in the giving of this name to this sūra:

The sūra does not call the besieging side by any one name. It gives no tribal name, no name of a leader. The word it uses says what that side is: companies separate from one another, insufficient on their own, able to form a force only by coming together. That is, even in defining the enemy the name says that the enemy is a temporary composite.

And indeed the twenty-fifth verse will describe the dissolving of this composite, and the verb used there will be رَدَّ — to turn back. What came together dispersed; the word itself had already announced this.

Historical frame: what we know, and from where

I apply here the three-layered frame set up at al-Fatḥ, because in this sūra the risk of confusion is higher. The sūra refers to a military event from the ninth verse to the twenty-seventh, and to a family event in the thirty-seventh — it narrates neither. The narrative comes entirely from the biographical reports.

What the text of the Qurʾān says

The whole of what can be drawn from the sūra as fact about the siege section (9-27) is this:

  • Armies (junūd) came upon those addressed; a wind and armies unseen were sent against them (9).
  • Those who came came from above and from below (10).
  • Eyes swerved, hearts reached the throats, and all manner of surmises were entertained about God (10).
  • The believers were tested and shaken with a violent shaking (11).
  • The hypocrites and those with sickness in their hearts said that the promise given was a delusion (12).
  • One party said, "O people of Yathrib, there is no place for you to stay, go back" (13).
  • Another party asked leave, alleging that their houses were exposed; the verse records that this was a cover (13).
  • There was a pledge given earlier: "we shall not turn our backs" (15).
  • One party held others back and said to their brothers, "come to us" (18).
  • When the danger passed, that same party spoke with sharp tongues (19).
  • One party supposes the aḥzāb have not gone; if they came, it would wish to be out in the desert among the bedouin (20).
  • The believers said, when they saw the aḥzāb, that their faith increased (22).
  • There are men who kept the pledge they gave; some have died, some are waiting (23).
  • The disbelievers were turned back with their rage, having gained no good (25).
  • Those of the People of the Book who supported them were brought down from their strongholds; some were killed, some taken captive (26).
  • Their land, their dwellings, their possessions and a land they had not set foot on were given in inheritance (27).

What the text says about the Zayd section (37):

  • There is a person whom God had favoured and whom the Prophet had also favoured, and his name is Zayd.
  • The Prophet said to him, "keep your wife with you, and be mindful of God".
  • The Prophet concealed within himself something that God was to bring out, and was wary of people; the verse says that the one to be wary of is God.
  • When Zayd had ended his tie with that woman, God married her to the Prophet.
  • The ground is given openly: so that there should be no difficulty for the believers regarding the wives of their adopted sons.

What the Qurʾān does not say

The only place-name in the sūra is Yathrib (13) — and that from the mouths not of the believers but of those calling for a return. The word "trench" (khandaq) does not occur in the Qurʾān. The name "Medina" occurs twice in this sūra (at 60, al-madīna), but not in the account of the siege.

None of the following is in the text: how many days the siege lasted; the existence, the shape, or the proposer of a dug entrenchment; which tribes the besiegers were; their numbers; the names of the commanders; the name of the group mentioned in verse 26; in which year the siege occurred; how many were killed; who "those who kept their pledge" in verse 23 were.

In the account of Zayd what is missing from the text is even more striking: the woman's name; how the marriage was made; how it ended; what it was that the Prophet "concealed within himself"; the sequence and the duration of the events.

All of this comes from the reports, and on some points the sources differ from one another.

What the reports recount

In the classical works of exegesis and biography it is widely reported that verses 9-27 came down after a combined siege directed at Medina in the fifth year of the Hijra. The account is transmitted in outline as follows: that a force based in Mecca, joining with certain surrounding tribes and with a group expelled from Medina, besieged the city; that for defence a trench was dug along the open side of the city; that the siege lasted some weeks; that provisions ran short and the weather was cold; that news spread within the city of a breakdown in relations with a group bound by treaty; and that in the end a violent wind tore up the tents and the besiegers dispersed.

In this commentary I use this account with the note "it is transmitted", and without entering into detail. I give no tribal name, no personal name, and no numbers. The reason is the measure recorded at al-Ḥujurāt and at al-Fatḥ: attaching the name of a tribe or a community to a verse can be read as a ruling about people who today bear that name or are traced to that lineage. The wording of the Qurʾān does not do this; the verse speaks not of a tribe but of "those who came", "those who said", "those who kept their pledge".

Verses 26-27 require a further note as well, and it will be given in detail beneath those verses: the text recounts a single event that took place upon a breach of treaty, concerning one community, within the law of war of that day. No general ruling about a religion or a lineage is drawn from these verses. The note in Method that "no wholesale ruling is issued about an ethnic or religious group" does its heaviest work in this sūra just there.

For the account of Zayd it is reported in the sources that Zayd was adopted by the Prophet and was for a time called "Zayd b. Muḥammad"; and that after the regulation in verses 4-5 this ascription was removed. Into the details about how the marriage was made and how it ended I do not enter; I explain the reason at verse 37.

How these two layers should be used

The four measures set down at al-Fatḥ hold here too; I repeat them briefly and add a fifth.

One. The reports are necessary, because the sūra does not narrate an event, it refers to one. Only the reports supply the context.

Two. The reports do not carry the same degree of certainty as the Qurʾān. The details are given with the note "this is how it is transmitted", and no detail is made a condition of a verse's meaning.

Three. The human states the sūra describes do not depend on the reports. The swerving of the eye, the heart at the throat, the manufacture of excuses, the voice that rises once the danger has passed — these can be read and recognised with no information brought in from outside.

Four. No wholesale ruling will be issued about any group. When the sūra says "the hypocrites" it names not an identity but a behaviour; the measure recorded at al-Munāfiqūn holds here too: hypocrisy is by definition something that cannot be seen from outside, and therefore these verses cannot be used to identify anyone else.

Five — particular to this sūra. The sūra contains verses about the Prophet's family, his wives and his household (6, 28-34, 37, 50-53, 55, 59). Some of these verses stand at the centre of the oldest disagreements in Islamic history. The path followed in this commentary is this: the disagreement is not concealed; it is given in a table, with its grounds, and impartially; no preference is imposed; no insinuation is made against any group; no polemic is entered. The data the text gives (wording, context, form) is recorded separately — but it is also recorded that a datum of the text does not by itself settle a debate.

The structure of the sūra

BlockVersesSubjectWhat closes the block
Opening: whom one follows1-3Mindfulness of God; not obeying the disbelievers and the hypocrites; following the revelation; reliancewakīlā
The principle: name and reality4-5No two hearts in one body; ẓihār; adoption; the preserving of the tie of lineageghafūran raḥīmā
The re-founding of the bond6The precedence of the Prophet; the maternal standing of his wives; kinshipmasṭūrā
The covenant7-8The firm pledge taken from the prophets; the truthfulness that will be asked of the truthfulʿadhāban alīmā
Siege I: the scene9-11The wind and the unseen armies; the eyes, the hearts, the surmises; the test and the shakingzilzālan shadīdā
Siege II: the anatomy of an excuse12-20The promise counted a delusion; "there is no place to stay"; "our houses are exposed"; the reminder of the pledge given; sharp tongues; ashiḥḥaillā qalīlā
Siege III: the other side21-24Uswa ḥasana; the response of the believers; the men who kept their pledge; a two-branched outcomeghafūran raḥīmā
Siege IV: the dissolving25-27Being turned back in rage; the bringing down of the supporters; inheritanceqadīrā
The household I: a choice28-29Two roads set before the wives: the life of this world, or God, His Messenger and the hereafterajran ʿaẓīmā
The household II: standing and measure30-34A twofold responsibility; "you are not like any of the women"; speech, house, prayer, alms, obedience; taṭhīr; remembering what is recitedkhabīrā
The general principle35Ten paired attributes; the longest parallel enumeration of man and womanajran ʿaẓīmā
Application: Zayd36-40The removal of the option; the account; the ground; khātam al-nabiyyīnʿalīmā
Direction: remembrance and messengership41-48Much remembrance; glorification morning and evening; ṣalāt; five attributes; paying no heed to injurywakīlā
The household III: regulations49-52Divorce without a waiting period; rulings particular to the Prophet; the easing of the turn; the limitraqībā
The household IV: conduct53-55Not entering without leave; not lingering over talk; asking from behind a screen; those within the degrees of kinshipshahīdā
Ṣalāt and injury56-58The ṣalāt of God and of the angels; the ṣalāt of the believers; the two directions of injurymubīnā
Being recognised59Jilbāb; the verse's own ground: to be recognised and not injuredghafūran raḥīmā
The order of the city60-62Those who spread baseless news; sunnat Allāhtabdīlā
The Hour63-68That its time is unknown; the turning of the faces; "we obeyed our masters"laʿnan kabīrā
Speech69-71Do not be like those who injured Moses (Mūsā); qawlan sadīdfawzan ʿaẓīmā
Closing: the trust72-73The offering of the trust; the shrinking of the heavens; man's taking it up; the outcomeghafūran raḥīmā

Three things in this structure are worth noticing.

One. The sūra opens with a principle and is centred on the application of that principle. The fourth and fifth verses abolish the ascription of the adopted son; verses thirty-six to forty recount a concrete consequence of that abolition. The thirty verses in between — siege, household, general principle — are the ground that binds the two together. The sūra has set the place where it lays down the ruling thirty verses away from the place where it applies it. This is not disorder; it is an order that lets the principle settle before the application. I record it as my own reading.

Two. The word heart stands along the spine of the sūra. Its first occurrence is in the fourth verse (qalbayn — two hearts), and there it states an impossibility. Then it comes one after another in the siege section: hearts reach the throats (10), in hearts there is sickness (12), hearts are filled with taẓunnūn (10). And it continues with taṭhīr in the thirty-third verse and with qulūbikum wa qulūbihinna in the fifty-third. The sūra opens indivisibility with the heart and carries on purification with the heart.

Three. There are two notices of "sunnat Allāh" (38 and 62), and both come after a regulation. The sūra presents the rulings it brings not as "new" but as the continuation of a way that has always run.

Four axes running through the sūra

Before coming to the verses let me record the four threads that touch the whole sūra; each will be treated separately at the relevant verse.

The first axis: name and reality. 4, 5, 13, 37, 40. The distance between the name given to a thing and the thing itself. The founding idea of the sūra.

The second axis: injury (أ-ذ-ي). The word occurs in the sūra with unusual density: 48, 53 (twice), 57, 58, 59, 69. And each time it has a different face: injury done to the Prophet, the discomfort the Prophet felt but could not voice, slander against the believers, the harassment women met with in the street, and what a past prophet suffered from his people. The sūra describes hurting as a social fact.

The third axis: speech (ق-و-ل and its kin). Qawlukum bi-afwāhikum (4), lā takhḍaʿna bi'l-qawl (32), qawlan maʿrūfā (32), qawlan sadīdā (70). The sūra makes the manner in which a thing is said a matter of ethics.

The fourth axis: the house (بيت). The word occurs again and again in the sūra: buyūtunā ʿawra (13), qarna fī buyūtikunna (33), ahl al-bayt (33), buyūtikunna (34), buyūt al-nabiyy (53), buyūtihinna (in the context of 55). The sūra begins at the houses of a city under siege and goes as far as the door of a prophet's house. In this sūra the house is the name both of what is to be protected and of the boundary that must be kept.

The basmala

The analysis of the basmala was made at al-Fātiḥa; it is not repeated here. The verse numbers are counted without the basmala.


33/1-3

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّبِىُّ ٱتَّقِ ٱللَّهَ وَلَا تُطِعِ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ وَٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ · وَٱتَّبِعْ مَا يُوحَىٰٓ إِلَيْكَ مِن رَّبِّكَ · وَتَوَكَّلْ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ وَكِيلًا

Yā ayyuha'l-nabiyyu'ttaqi'llāha wa lā tuṭiʿi'l-kāfirīna wa'l-munāfiqīn, inna'llāha kāna ʿalīman ḥakīmā · Wa'ttabiʿ mā yūḥā ilayka min rabbik, inna'llāha kāna bimā taʿmalūna khabīrā · Wa tawakkal ʿala'llāh, wa kafā bi'llāhi wakīlā

"O Prophet! Guard yourself against God; do not obey the disbelievers and the hypocrites. God is Knowing, Wise. · Follow what is revealed to you from your Lord. God is aware of what you do. · Rely on God. God suffices as a trustee."

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّبِىُّ — the choice of address

At al-Muzzammil the Qurʾān's forms of address to the Prophet were set out in a table; what was recorded there was this: the address يَا أَيُّهَا ٱلنَّبِىُّ calls not to the person but to the office.

This sūra opens with that address and repeats it five times within the sūra: 1, 28, 45, 50, 59. A command follows all five, and all five begin a different block of the sūra. That is, the address is the sūra's section-marker.

PlaceWhat follows
33/1Taqwā, and whom one is not to obey
33/28The choice to be set before the wives
33/45The enumeration of the attributes of messengership
33/50A regulation particular to the Prophet
33/59What is to be said to his wives, his daughters and the believing women

A fact of word order worth recording: three of the five addresses (28, 50, 59) concern the Prophet's household and family. The sūra uses the form that calls to the office most often in the places that have to do with the house. This shows that the affairs of the household are placed not as a piece of private life but as a part of the office. I record this as my own reading.

ٱتَّقِ ٱللَّهَ — the saying of "guard yourself" to a prophet

Root: و-ق-ي. To protect oneself, to take a shield for oneself. The analysis of the root was made at al-Baqara (2/2, hudan li'l-muttaqīn); I do not repeat it here.

What is striking here is the one addressed. Saying to a prophet "guard yourself against God" may look unnecessary at first sight. But the sense of the root corrects that impression: taqwā is not a moving away from a sin but a search for protection. And the search is required not according to a level but according to a situation.

Indeed it is enough to look at what comes immediately after the command: "do not obey the disbelievers and the hypocrites." That is, taqwā here is not an abstract call to piety; it is the name of a concrete answer to be given in the face of a pressure.

وَلَا تُطِعِ — "do not obey"

Root: ط-و-ع. The concrete sense of the root is willingness; as was recorded at al-Fatḥ and at al-ʿAlaq, ṭawʿ is the opposite of karh (compulsion).

And this explains why the prohibition is framed with this verb. The verse does not say "do not do what they say"; it says "do not fall in willingly with them". That is, what is forbidden is not something done under compulsion; it is an alignment a person enters by his own consent.

And the command lā tuṭiʿ occurs twice in the sūra: here (1) and in the forty-eighth verse. Between the two lie the twenty-seven verses of the siege section and the nineteen verses of the household section. That is, the sūra frames all the sections in between by repeating the same command at its two ends. In the forty-eighth verse an addition will be made to the command: wa daʿ adhāhum — "pay no heed to their injury."

The disbelievers and the hypocrites side by side

The two groups are named within the same prohibition, and this announces in advance the whole shape of the sūra: in the siege section too the two will stand side by side — one from outside (9-10, 25), the other from inside (12-20).

But what the two words point to is not the same. As recorded at al-Baqara, the root ك-ف-ر is to cover; the root ن-ف-ق, as recorded at al-Munāfiqūn, is to have two doors. One names an open refusal, the other a hidden way out.

And the reason the two are joined in the same prohibition stands in the verb of the verse: obedience. A person may fall in with either of them for the same reason — pressure, interest, the desire to fit in. That is, the verse is not likening the two groups to one another; it is saying that falling in with them is the same thing.

Per the method (Method) I record: both of the words named here are attributes, not the name of a community. Whoever bears that attribute is the one the verse speaks of.

وَٱتَّبِعْ — the counterpart of the prohibition

The second verse leaves no gap. The first verse said "do not follow"; the second verse says "follow this".

This is a recurring structure in the Qurʾān's way of framing a prohibition, and it is worth recording: when one direction is closed, another direction is put in its place. The gap that is closed is not left empty.

تَتَّبِعْ / ٱتَّبِعْroot ت-ب-ع: to go behind someone, to follow his track. The word presupposes a precedence: the one followed is in front, the one following behind.

مَا يُوحَىٰٓ إِلَيْكَ — the imperfect

The verb is not perfect (ūḥiya — has been revealed) but imperfect (yūḥā — is being revealed). The form conveys an action in progress.

And this describes the sūra's own situation: the sūra consists of verses that came down in the middle of a siege, a family, a city. Revelation is named here not as a completed text but as something coming down into the midst of events.

وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ وَكِيلًا — the pattern

The construction كَفَىٰ بِـ in Arabic states a sufficiency, and the bāʾ at its head is among the particles the lexicographers count as zāʾida (added for emphasis): it carries a stress like "sufficient indeed is God".

وَكِيل — root و-ك-ل. To commit a matter to another; a wakīl is the one to whom the matter is left. From the same root, tawakkul — to leave the matter to him.

The nicety in the word order of the verse: in the same sentence the verb comes first (tawakkal), then the attribute that is the object of that verb (wakīlā). That is, the command and the ground of the command are from the same root. "Leave it to Him; because the one to whom things are left is He."

Context

The three verses set up a sequence, and the sequence cannot be reversed:

OrderCommandIts function
1IttaqiThe inner state — the search for protection
2Lā tuṭiʿTowards the outside — not falling into line
3IttabiʿDirection — what is to be followed
4TawakkalLeaving the outcome

The fourth step meets the cost of the first three. Not falling in with the disbeliever and the hypocrite exacts a price; for that price to be bearable, the outcome must be capable of being left somewhere. The rest of the sūra — the siege section above all — will look precisely at the moment when that price is paid.

What this says to the present

The prohibition of the first verse, said in a contemporary idiom, is this: aligning oneself with a group's expectations out of an anxiety to look good.

The verse depicts this as a pressure coming from two different sources: those who openly oppose, and those who work from inside to soften. And the second is usually the more effective, because it speaks the same language.

The measure the verse gives is not a call to resistance but a call to a direction: not "do not follow", but follow this. The most durable form of standing against something is not standing against it, but being attached to something else.


33/4

مَّا جَعَلَ ٱللَّهُ لِرَجُلٍ مِّن قَلْبَيْنِ فِى جَوْفِهِۦ وَمَا جَعَلَ أَزْوَٰجَكُمُ ٱلَّٰٓـِٔى تُظَٰهِرُونَ مِنْهُنَّ أُمَّهَٰتِكُمْ وَمَا جَعَلَ أَدْعِيَآءَكُمْ أَبْنَآءَكُمْ ذَٰلِكُمْ قَوْلُكُم بِأَفْوَٰهِكُمْ وَٱللَّهُ يَقُولُ ٱلْحَقَّ وَهُوَ يَهْدِى ٱلسَّبِيلَ

Mā jaʿala'llāhu li-rajulin min qalbayni fī jawfih, wa mā jaʿala azwājakumu'llāʾī tuẓāhirūna minhunna ummahātikum, wa mā jaʿala adʿiyāʾakum abnāʾakum, dhālikum qawlukum bi-afwāhikum, wa'llāhu yaqūlu'l-ḥaqqa wa huwa yahdi'l-sabīl

"God has not made two hearts inside any man. He has not made your wives, of whom you make the ẓihār declaration, your mothers. He has not made your adopted sons your sons. These are your sayings with your mouths. God says the truth, and He guides to the way."

The founding verse of the sūra

This verse is the most important place in the sūra, and the reason lies less in its content than in its function. The verse lays down the principle on which every ruling that follows will rest.

There are three sentences, and all three are built on the same pattern: مَا جَعَلَ ٱللَّهُ — "God has not made…".

ClauseThe claimThe reality
1. Two hearts in one bodyThere can be two centres inside a personThere cannot — a person is not divisible
2. ẒihārA word makes a wife a motherIt does not — motherhood comes by bearing
3. The adopted sonA word makes an adopted son a son by birthIt does not — lineage is founded by birth

This table was also set up at al-Mujādala when ẓihār was treated; I take it from there and I rely on that treatment.

But there is a further question that must be asked here: why are these three things in the same sentence?

The answer lies in the structure the three share: all three are a claim about reality established by speech. The first is a way of thinking, the second a legal act, the third a social institution. But all three make the same mistake: they erase the difference between saying and being.

And the verse closes all three with a single ruling: dhālikum qawlukum bi-afwāhikum.

مَّا جَعَلَ ٱللَّهُ لِرَجُلٍ مِّن قَلْبَيْنِ فِى جَوْفِهِۦ

The sentence must be opened word by word, because every word in it has been chosen.

جَعَلَ — root ج-ع-ل. To bring a thing into a state, to render, to arrange. Its difference from khalaqa (to create) is this: khalq conveys bringing into being out of nothing, jaʿl conveys giving a quality or a function to what already exists. That the verb chosen here is jaʿl is significant: the verse is not giving a piece of information about creation, it is speaking about a matter of status. "God did not give this thing this function."

لِرَجُلٍ — "for a man". Since it comes indefinite and in a negative context, it conveys generality: "for no man at all". That the word is rajul is explained in two ways in classical exegesis: (a) the context concerns matters founded by the man's act, such as ẓihār and adoption; (b) rajul here stands for "human being" as a kind. That this does not mean the ruling leaves woman outside is clear from the fact that those addressed in the second sentence are again men.

قَلْبَيْنِ — the dual. Two hearts.

فِى جَوْفِهِۦ — "inside him, in his cavity". Root: ج-و-ف. Jawf — the inner cavity of a thing; the inside of the body. Ajwaf — that which is hollow.

It is worth pausing on why this note is added. "He has not made two hearts" would have sufficed; the addition of "inside him" looks like a repetition. But the repetition does a piece of work: it says that the place where the heart is, is a single enclosed volume. That is, the matter is not the existence of two organs; it is that two centres cannot be found in a single cavity.

The conception of the heart recorded at al-Ḥujurāt works here too: in the Qurʾān the heart is depicted as an enclosed volume — it is sealed, it is locked, sickness is found within it, rust lies upon it. This verse states the singleness of that volume.

What the sentence says, and what it does not say

Care is needed here, because two kinds of interpretation circulate about this sentence.

What it does not say: This sentence is not giving a piece of anatomy and cannot be presented as a "scientific miracle". The note in Method that "no hunting for scientific miracles is done" works here exactly. The verse is not reporting the number of the human heart; it is already using the word heart in the sense of the centre of consciousness — indeed the same sūra will say a few verses later "those in whose hearts is sickness", and there too no organ will be meant.

What it says: There cannot be two separate centres of orientation inside a person. And this connects directly with the context of the verse: a woman cannot be both wife and mother; a child cannot be both another man's son and your son. One body, one centre.

In classical exegesis several explanations are transmitted about the setting of this sentence:

ExplanationWhat it saysIts link with the verse
The impossibility of hypocrisyFaith and denial do not lodge in one heartVerse 1 of the sūra had named the hypocrites; 12-20 will describe them at length
An introduction to ẓihār and adoptionThe sentence is an image set up for the two sentences that followWord order: three sentences in the same pattern
An answer to a particular sayingIt is transmitted that someone in that milieu, boasting of his intelligence, said "I have two hearts inside me"It rests on a report; its details are not certain

The third explanation has been given with the note "it is transmitted"; it is not presented as certain knowledge. And this must be recorded: the first and second explanations do not exclude one another. The function of the sentence within the sūra is the same whichever explanation is taken: the principle of indivisibility.

تُظَٰهِرُونَ مِنْهُنَّ — ẓihār

Root: ظ-ه-ر (back). What ẓihār is, why it is framed with the word "back", its legal consequence in the pre-Islamic period, the three-step procedure the Qurʾān brought and the regulation of the expiation were treated in detail at al-Mujādala (58/1-4). I rely on that treatment here and do not repeat it.

Of what was recorded there I recall only what is needed to understand this verse: ẓihār was a man's saying to his wife "you are to me as my mother's back"; in that order this saying left the woman suspended, neither divorced nor married. Sūrat al-Mujādala removed that suspension.

What al-Aḥzāb does is different, and complementary. Al-Mujādala brought the regulation (the invalidity of the saying + the expiation). Al-Aḥzāb ties the reason why the saying is invalid to a principle: because there are not two hearts in one body.

A note on word order: in al-Mujādala the verb is yuẓāhirūna min nisāʾihim (from their women), here it is tuẓāhirūna minhunna — and before it comes azwājakum (your wives). Al-Aḥzāb uses the word "wife". That is, the verse names the object of ẓihār not as "woman" but as the one bound by the tie of marriage. What the saying sets out to break is thereby plainly visible: a bond.

أَدْعِيَآءَكُمْ — adopted sons

Singular: دَعِىّ (daʿiyy). Root: د-ع-و. To call, to summon, to name, to invite. From the same root: duʿāʾ, dāʿī (the one who calls — it will be used of the Prophet in verse 46 of this sūra), daʿwā (a claim), iddiʿāʾ.

The word itself carries the ruling within it. Daʿiyy means "the one called a son" — that is, in the root of the word there is calling, not bearing. Even in naming the adopted child, the Arabic language said that he is attached by a relation of name.

This supports the argument of the verse from within the language: the name of the adopted son is already "the one called". And the verse will correct exactly this in the next verse: udʿūhum li-ābāʾihim — "call them by their fathers." The same root, the same verb; only the direction changes.

On the institution of adoption

It is transmitted in the classical sources that in pre-Islamic Arabia the institution of tabannī (adoption) was widespread, that the adopted child was called by the name of the one who adopted him, that he inherited from him, and that his tie with his own lineage was in effect severed. This is a fact known beyond that period as well: similar institutions are found in many ancient legal orders.

What the verse does is not to abolish the institution altogether but to abolish the false lineage the institution set up. The fifth verse will say this openly: the child may be cared for, looked after, counted a brother — but his father is his father.

ذَٰلِكُمْ قَوْلُكُم بِأَفْوَٰهِكُمْ — the seal of the ruling

The ruling common to the three sentences.

بِأَفْوَٰهِكُمْ — "with your mouths". The finding recorded at al-Mujādala about this note holds here too and is worth repeating: speech is said with the mouth in any case; to state this separately looks like a repetition. But the repetition does a piece of work — it says that the saying stays in the mouth, that it does not pass into reality.

To this I add one thing. The Qurʾān uses this pattern in other places too, and in all of them it does the same work: "They say with their mouths what is not in their hearts" (al-Fatḥ 48/11); "That is their saying with their mouths" (al-Tawba 9/30). Each time, a gap between the saying and the reality is being announced.

The plural of فَم is afwāh. And the naming of the organ stresses that speech is a place of exit — not a place of arrival.

وَٱللَّهُ يَقُولُ ٱلْحَقَّ — the contrast

The last two sentences of the verse set up a contrast, and the contrast works at the level of the verb.

SubjectVerbObjectWhere it stays
Manqawlukumto sayẓihār, tabannībi-afwāhikum — in the mouth
Godwa'llāhuyaqūlual-ḥaqqyahdi'l-sabīl — on the way

Both sides speak; but the speech of one stays in the mouth, while the speech of the other opens a way.

ٱلْحَقّ — root ح-ق-ق. That which is fixed, which comes about, which stands in place. The concrete sense of the root was treated at al-Ḥāqqa. The word's place in this verse is particularly apt: ḥaqq is "that which is fixed" — and the whole concern of the verse is that fixity cannot be established by speech.

يَهْدِى ٱلسَّبِيلَ — "He guides to the way". The verb has taken its object directly, without the particle ilā (yahdi'l-sabīl). The lexicographers count this among the verb's uses in which it can take the object directly.

And the function of the sentence within the sūra is this: when something is abolished, the question arises of what will be put in its place. The verse places the note of guidance immediately after the sentence that does the abolishing. The fifth verse will name that way.

What this says to the present

What this verse says to the present is bound to none of its three examples. What it is bound to is the principle.

Giving a thing a new name does not change the thing. This was recorded at al-Mujādala; here one further step is possible.

The verse also says why naming does not work: because a name is a matter of the mouth, while reality is a matter of the body. The distance between the two does not close.

And the verse also shows whom naming harms: in ẓihār, the woman; in tabannī, the child. In both examples the one who fixes the name pays no cost; the cost is paid by the one on whom the name is fixed. Naming is, most of the time, a tool in the hand of the stronger.

I record this as my own reading. The datum standing in the text is this: in both examples the agent of the verb is the man, and the one who bears the consequence is someone else.


33/5

ٱدْعُوهُمْ لِءَابَآئِهِمْ هُوَ أَقْسَطُ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ فَإِن لَّمْ تَعْلَمُوٓا۟ ءَابَآءَهُمْ فَإِخْوَٰنُكُمْ فِى ٱلدِّينِ وَمَوَٰلِيكُمْ وَلَيْسَ عَلَيْكُمْ جُنَاحٌ فِيمَآ أَخْطَأْتُم بِهِۦ وَلَٰكِن مَّا تَعَمَّدَتْ قُلُوبُكُمْ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا

Udʿūhum li-ābāʾihim huwa aqsaṭu ʿinda'llāh, fa-in lam taʿlamū ābāʾahum fa-ikhwānukum fi'l-dīni wa mawālīkum, wa laysa ʿalaykum junāḥun fīmā akhṭaʾtum bihī wa lākin mā taʿammadat qulūbukum, wa kāna'llāhu ghafūran raḥīmā

"Call them by their fathers; that is more equitable in God's sight. If you do not know their fathers, then they are your brothers in religion and your friends. There is no blame on you for what you have done in error; but what your hearts have intended is another matter. God is Forgiving, Merciful."

The application of the fourth verse

The preceding verse made an abolition. This verse says what is to be done after the abolition. And there are four steps, in order:

1. The basic rule: call him by his father. 2. If the father is unknown: brother and friend. 3. A wrong done in the past: no liability. 4. The measure: the intention of the heart.

ٱدْعُوهُمْ — the same root, the opposite direction

The verb is from the root د-ع-و and is from the same root as adʿiyāʾ in the preceding verse. In the fourth verse the root named a false ascription; in the fifth it establishes the true one.

This is a nicety to be recorded at the level of word order: the verse does not forbid the faulty act; it turns its direction. It does not say "do not call", it says "call thus". A name will be given to the child; only the name will be tied to the right place.

لِءَابَآئِهِمْ — the particle lām. The lām here conveys belonging: "as belonging to their fathers". That is, the ascription is not a preference but a statement of membership.

أَقْسَطُ — root ق-س-ط

This root was treated in detail at al-Ḥujurāt (49/9, aqsiṭū) and its use with the opposite sense was recorded at al-Jinn. I rely on that treatment; I bring here only what is needed for this verse.

What was recorded there:

  • The concrete sense of the root: a portion, a share; and the giving of the share as it is due. Qisṭ — a share. Muqsiṭ — the one who gives the share rightly.
  • In Form IV (aqsaṭa) the root conveys justice, in the bare form (qasaṭa) injustice — it is among the examples the lexicographers mention under the heading aḍdād.
  • The difference between ʿadl and qisṭ: ʿadl looks to the scales (are the two sides equal), qisṭ looks to the share (has each received what is his).

And this distinction works exactly in this verse. Why does the verse say أَقْسَط (the one that gives the share more rightly) rather than aʿdal (more just)?

Because what is at issue is not a matter of equalising but a matter of a share. Ascribing a child to his father is not giving something to anyone or taking something from anyone; it is showing rightly whose share belongs to whom. Lineage is less like a piece of property than like a portion: a person's share in the place he came from.

That the word comes in the elative (comparative) pattern is also worth noting. The verse does not say "this is just and the other is injustice"; it says "this is more correct". The pattern makes a correction without accusing the other side — and indeed, in the continuation of the verse liability for what was done in the past will be lifted. Pattern and ruling agree with each other.

عِندَ ٱللَّهِ — "in God's sight". The function of the note is this: the ground of this regulation is not social utility. The verse does not say "this is more useful" or "this is more orderly". It says who it is that lays down the measure.

فَإِن لَّمْ تَعْلَمُوٓا۟ ءَابَآءَهُمْ — where the father is unknown

The verse makes not an exception but a filling of a gap. For as soon as the rule is laid down a question arises: what of the child whose father is unknown?

فَإِخْوَٰنُكُمْ فِى ٱلدِّينِ — "your brothers in religion". وَمَوَٰلِيكُمْ — "and your friends, your close ones".

مَوَالِي — singular مَوْلَى. Root: و-ل-ي. To be near, to be adjacent. This root is the same as that of mawlā at Muḥammad (47/11, mawla'lladhīna āmanū) and of awlā in verse 6 of this sūra — we shall come to it a few lines below.

The word mawlā covers a wide field in Arabic, and this comes from the sense of "nearness" in its root: master, the one who frees, the one freed, friend, helper, neighbour, cousin, ally by treaty. The word conveys not a hierarchy but an adjacency; the hierarchy comes from the context.

What the verse does here is striking and worth recording. When the tie of lineage was removed, a gap could have been left: the child might have belonged nowhere. The verse closes that gap — but not by inventing a false lineage; by naming a real bond. Brotherhood and being a mawlā are bonds that are made; they are not bonds that come by birth, and they carry no claim to take the place of bonds that come by birth.

That is, the verse does not remove the relationship; it puts the right name to the relationship. The founding principle of the sūra is at work here too.

وَلَيْسَ عَلَيْكُمْ جُنَاحٌ فِيمَآ أَخْطَأْتُم بِهِۦ

جُنَاح — root ج-ن-ح. A wing; and to lean to one side, to incline. Junāḥ is a swerving to one side from what is right — from this comes the sense "sin, liability".

أَخْطَأْتُم — root خ-ط-أ. Khaṭaʾ — an unintended mistake. When this root was treated at al-Ḥāqqa, the distinction between خَطَأ (unintended error) and خِطْء (deliberate sin) was recorded, and this very verse was given as the example. I rely on that treatment.

This sentence has two possible extents, and both are mentioned in classical exegesis:

ExtentWhat it says
RetrospectiveThere is no liability for ascriptions made before this regulation came
ProspectiveNor is there liability hereafter for a wrong ascription made by a slip of the tongue or in ignorance

The two do not exclude one another and the wording of the verse is open to both. I do not impose a preference.

وَلَٰكِن مَّا تَعَمَّدَتْ قُلُوبُكُمْ — where the measure lies

تَعَمَّدَ — root ع-م-د. ʿAmūd — a post, a pillar; the upright element that holds a thing up. ʿAmada — he turned towards a thing, he intended it. Taʿammud — doing a thing with intent.

The link between the concrete sense of the root and intention is striking: the pillar is the point a building takes its direction from — everything rests on it. Taʿammud is the point of support behind an act.

And the place where the measure is set is the heart: mā taʿammadat qulūbukum. What is looked at is not the error the tongue makes but the intention the heart forms.

This closes a ring with the fourth verse, and this is the most elegant fact of word order to be recorded here:

  • The fourth verse: "there are not two hearts in one body" — the heart, the place of indivisibility.
  • The fourth verse: "this is what you say with your mouths" — speech stays in the mouth.
  • The fifth verse: "what your hearts have intended is another matter" — liability lies not in the mouth but in the heart.

That is, within two verses the sūra transfers authority from the mouth to the heart. The mouth cannot establish reality; nor does the mouth bear the liability. Both are tied to the heart.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the arrangement of the three expressions within two verses.

On the ruling that preserves the tie of lineage

This verse is counted among the basic texts on which the regulations concerning the preservation of lineage in Islamic law rest. This commentary does not enter into legal detail; it records only the frame that emerges from the wording of the verse:

  • Lineage is not established by speech and is not undone by speech. It is established by birth.
  • A child is ascribed to his real father. This has been characterised as "more correct" (aqsaṭ).
  • If the father is unknown, there is no question of the child belonging nowhere: a tie of brotherhood and of being a mawlā is established.
  • Caring for, raising and protecting a child are not forbidden. What is forbidden is the alteration of the child's lineage.

Proceeding from this frame the schools have developed detailed rulings on the child's care, inheritance, the degrees of kinship, and guardianship (walāya), and these rulings differ from one another. These differences are not the subject of this commentary, and no preference is adopted here.

What this says to the present

The measure of the verse works today in places very different from the institution out of which it arose.

One. A child's right to know where he comes from. The verse protects the knowledge: the note "if you do not know their fathers" presupposes that knowing is the norm and not knowing the exception. The Qurʾān here stands against the erasure of a piece of knowledge.

Two. The difference between caring for a child and altering who he is. In abolishing the second the verse does not merely preserve the first; it also gives it a name: ikhwān, mawālī. No false bond is needed in order to care.

Three. The measure of the word aqsaṭ. A regulation has been characterised as "more correct", not as "obligatory" or "useful". And since qisṭ is the word that indicates a share: a person's share in his own past is a right that belongs to him.


33/6

ٱلنَّبِىُّ أَوْلَىٰ بِٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ مِنْ أَنفُسِهِمْ وَأَزْوَٰجُهُۥٓ أُمَّهَٰتُهُمْ وَأُو۟لُوا۟ ٱلْأَرْحَامِ بَعْضُهُمْ أَوْلَىٰ بِبَعْضٍ فِى كِتَٰبِ ٱللَّهِ مِنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ وَٱلْمُهَٰجِرِينَ إِلَّآ أَن تَفْعَلُوٓا۟ إِلَىٰٓ أَوْلِيَآئِكُم مَّعْرُوفًا كَانَ ذَٰلِكَ فِى ٱلْكِتَٰبِ مَسْطُورًا

Al-nabiyyu awlā bi'l-muʾminīna min anfusihim wa azwājuhu ummahātuhum, wa ulu'l-arḥāmi baʿḍuhum awlā bi-baʿḍin fī kitābi'llāhi mina'l-muʾminīna wa'l-muhājirīna illā an tafʿalū ilā awliyāʾikum maʿrūfā, kāna dhālika fi'l-kitābi masṭūrā

"The Prophet is nearer to the believers than their own selves (has more right over them). And his wives are their mothers. And blood relations are, in the Book of God, nearer to one another than the believers and the emigrants — except that you do a kindness to your friends. This is written in the Book."

The place of the verse in the sūra

This verse is the direct continuation of verses 4-5, and seeing this is necessary in order to understand it.

The fourth and fifth verses removed two bonds: the false motherhood set up by ẓihār, the false sonship set up by tabannī. The sixth verse establishes two bonds: the precedence of the Prophet and the maternal standing of his wives. And then it puts real kinship in its place.

That is, the sūra takes the bonds apart and lays them out again. And the order is significant: first what is false is removed, then the place of what is real is fixed.

أَوْلَىٰ — the key word

Root: و-ل-ي. The concrete sense of the root is nearness, adjacency. Walī — the one who is near; walāya — the authority and responsibility born of nearness; mawlā — it occurred in the preceding verse; tawallī — to turn towards or to turn one's back (since it is a word of direction, it goes both ways); awwal — according to some lexicographers from the same root, "the foremost, the nearest".

أَوْلَىٰ is in the elative pattern: "nearer / having more right".

And this is the side of the word that resists translation. No single English word carries it, because in Arabic it says two things at once: nearness and precedence. The one nearest to a thing is the one with the most say over it.

That the word occurs twice in this verse is also worth noting:

PlaceWhoCompared with
1al-nabiyyumin anfusihim — the believers' own selves
2ulu'l-arḥāmi baʿḍuhummin al-muʾminīna wa'l-muhājirīn — the believers and the emigrants

The same word orders two different relationships. And there is no tension between the two; they speak of different fields.

ٱلنَّبِىُّ أَوْلَىٰ بِٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ مِنْ أَنفُسِهِمْ — the explanations of its extent

The extent of this sentence has been debated in classical exegesis. I give the disagreement in a table. I construct no legal conclusion and I do not impose a preference.

ExplanationWhat it saysIts groundThe limit to be recorded
Precedence of ruling and of callA command of the Prophet is preferred over the person's own choiceThe wording of the verse; verse 36 of the sūra (mā kāna li-muʾminin… al-khiyaratu)This does not fix the extent of the call; in which matters it holds has itself been debated
Compassion and careThe Prophet looks to the good of the believers more than they do themselvesThe expression that follows in the same verse, "his wives are their mothers" — the tie of compassion in motherhoodThis reading conveys not an authority but a quality
Debt and liabilityThe burden a believer leaves behind belongs to the ProphetSome reports are transmitted to this effect; their details are not given hereIt rests on a report; it is not explicit in the wording itself
Inheritance (the view that counts it abrogated)It is said that the sentence at first brought a precedence in inheritance, and that this was then regulated by the ulu'l-arḥām clause in the same verseThe subject of the second half of the verse is inheritance and kinshipThe claim of abrogation is disputed; no preference is adopted in this commentary

Two notes about this table:

One. These explanations do not entirely exclude one another. More than one may be true at once; the wording of the verse imposes no restriction.

Two. In this commentary no legal conclusion at all is drawn from this sentence. The explanations have been conveyed; which of them has been made the ground of which ruling, and the divergences of the schools on the question, are not the business of this place.

مِنْ أَنفُسِهِمْ — the work the word order does

What the sentence compares is striking. The verse does not say "the Prophet is nearer to you than your father, your mother, your tribe". What it sets opposite him is the person himself.

This is the furthest point a sentence of comparison can go in the Arabic language. Beyond the comparison no term is left: there is nothing nearer to a person than himself.

And the choice of the word nafs is also worth noting. Nafs is used in the Qurʾān both for "life, soul" and for "the person himself". The sentence uses both senses: "than your lives" and "than yourselves".

وَأَزْوَٰجُهُۥٓ أُمَّهَٰتُهُمْ — the maternal standing of the wives

This sentence is directly connected with the fourth verse, and if the connection is not recorded the verse remains half understood.

The fourth verse had said: a word does not make a woman a mother — "God has not made your wives, of whom you make the ẓihār declaration, your mothers."

The sixth verse says: the Prophet's wives are the mothers of the believers.

At first sight there seems to be a tension. There is none — and seeing the difference is the whole point of the verse.

Ẓihār (verse 4)This verse (6)
Who says itA man, with his own mouthGod, in His Book
The verbjaʿala negated: "He has not made"azwājuhu ummahātuhum — a nominal sentence, a ruling
What it establishesNothing; the saying stays in the mouthA standing
Its extentThe whole of motherhood is claimedLimited — see below

That is, the fourth verse was saying "human speech cannot establish a status"; the sixth verse shows who the party is that does establish a status. The two do not contradict; together they say exactly the principle of the sūra: status depends on the authority of the one who fixes the name.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that two verses use the same semantic field (motherhood) with two different subjects.

The extent of this maternal standing has been treated in classical exegesis, and there is a broad record on these two points: (a) the aspect of honour and respect; (b) the ruling in verse 53 of the sūra, "nor that you should marry them". Whether this standing extends to other aspects, such as inheritance and the degrees of kinship, has by contrast been debated, and no ruling is issued in this commentary.

وَأُو۟لُوا۟ ٱلْأَرْحَامِ — kinship

ٱلْأَرْحَام — singular رَحِم. Root: ر-ح-م. And the concrete sense of the root is the womb — the organ in which the child is carried in the mother. From the same root come raḥma, al-Raḥmān, al-Raḥīm.

This link of roots is one of the most striking word-webs in the Qurʾān, and it was treated at al-Fātiḥa. What was recorded there was this: in Arabic the name of mercy is derived from the name of an organ; mercy is the name of the bond between the one who carries and the one carried.

And in this verse the word works in exactly that sense: ulu'l-arḥām — "those who have wombs", that is, those who come from the same womb, those who share a tie of blood.

In view of the sūra as a whole this choice of word is worth noting: the fourth and fifth verses had removed the false lineage. The sixth verse names the real lineage with an anatomical word. Against what is established by speech is set what is established by an organ.

مِنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ وَٱلْمُهَٰجِرِينَ — set against what

The sentence sets kinship against two groups: the believers and the emigrants.

The historical background of this is transmitted in the classical sources as follows: that there was a practice of pairing as brothers between those who emigrated to Medina and the inhabitants of the city, and that this brotherhood for a time gave rise to a relationship of inheritance; it is transmitted that this verse tied inheritance to the tie of blood.

I give this account with the note "it is transmitted" and do not enter into its legal consequence. What emerges from the text is this: the verse does not deny the value of bonds that are made — indeed, immediately afterwards it opens a door to them.

إِلَّآ أَن تَفْعَلُوٓا۟ إِلَىٰٓ أَوْلِيَآئِكُم مَّعْرُوفًا — the door left open

There is a balance in the structure of the verse that is often missed.

The sentence set a limit (kinship comes first), then immediately opened an exception: "except that you do a kindness to your friends."

مَعْرُوف — root ع-ر-ف. What is known, recognised, what everyone agrees to be good. The word will occur twice in this sūra (6 and 32), and in both places it will convey a measure.

And what is striking is this: the verse does not put a prohibition in the place of what it removes. The order of inheritance is tied to kinship, but the possibility of doing good is left open.

This is a behaviour repeated throughout the sūra and worth recording: the fifth verse, in removing the lineage of the adopted son, left the tie of brotherhood and of being a mawlā; the sixth verse, in giving precedence in inheritance to kinship, left the door of kindness. In removing a ruling, the sūra leaves the human relationship standing behind it. I record this as my own reading.

كَانَ ذَٰلِكَ فِى ٱلْكِتَٰبِ مَسْطُورًا

مَسْطُور — root س-ط-ر. Saṭr — a line, a row, a sequence. Masṭūr — written line by line. From the same root asṭār (lines) and asāṭīr (what the ancients wrote or said — according to some lexicographers traced to the same root).

The concrete sense of the word contains an order: a line is not a random piece of writing but writing set in a sequence.

And the verse ends with this word. It says that the bonds established are not arbitrary, that they are written according to an order. This agrees with the principle of the sūra: the difference between what is said with the mouth and what is written on a line was established in the fourth verse.

What this says to the present

The three sentences of the verse describe three different bonds, and the order of the three gives a measure for today.

One. The tie of blood does not take the place of the chosen bond; but neither is it erased. The verse recognises both and gives each its own field. This leaves both the attitude that says "blood is everything" and the attitude that says "we choose our bonds" standing alone.

Two. Kindness can be done without a legal obligation. The last sentence of the verse does not leave empty the field that lies outside an order — it leaves that field to maʿrūf. The law does not close off the field of ethics.


33/7-8

وَإِذْ أَخَذْنَا مِنَ ٱلنَّبِيِّـۧنَ مِيثَٰقَهُمْ وَمِنكَ وَمِن نُّوحٍ وَإِبْرَٰهِيمَ وَمُوسَىٰ وَعِيسَى ٱبْنِ مَرْيَمَ وَأَخَذْنَا مِنْهُم مِّيثَٰقًا غَلِيظًا · لِّيَسْـَٔلَ ٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ عَن صِدْقِهِمْ وَأَعَدَّ لِلْكَٰفِرِينَ عَذَابًا أَلِيمًا

Wa idh akhadhnā mina'l-nabiyyīna mīthāqahum wa minka wa min Nūḥin wa Ibrāhīma wa Mūsā wa ʿĪsa'bni Maryam, wa akhadhnā minhum mīthāqan ghalīẓā · Li-yasʾala'l-ṣādiqīna ʿan ṣidqihim, wa aʿadda li'l-kāfirīna ʿadhāban alīmā

"And when We took from the prophets their pledge, and from you, and from Noah (Nūḥ), Abraham (Ibrāhīm), Moses (Mūsā) and Jesus (ʿĪsā) son of Mary (Maryam). We took from them a firm pledge. · So that He may ask the truthful about their truthfulness. And He has prepared for the disbelievers a painful punishment."

The place where the context seems to shift

On a first reading these two verses look unconnected with the five that precede them. After a regulation about adoption and kinship there is a sudden move to a pledge taken from the prophets.

The link lies in the concept of "the word given", and its function within the flow of the sūra is this:

The fourth and fifth verses said that the word that comes out of a man's mouth makes nothing real. The seventh verse shows when a word is binding: when the party who takes it is God, and when the word is ghalīẓ (heavy, firm).

That is, the sūra does not devalue the spoken word; it settles when a word is weighty. I record this as my own reading.

And there is a second link as well: a pledge given will be recalled in the siege section (verse 15)"they had earlier given God their pledge: that they would not turn their backs." The seventh verse lays the ground for that reminder. The sūra begins the giving of pledges with the prophets and brings it down to the believers.

مِيثَٰق — root و-ث-ق

To trust, to be firm, to bind. Wathīqa — a document; withāq — a bond, a strap; mīthāq — an agreement made fast.

The concrete sense of the root is a bond — and this agrees with the whole web of "bonds" in the sūra: the tie of lineage (4-5), the tie of kinship (6), the tie of a pledge (7).

مِّيثَٰقًا غَلِيظًا — "a thick word"

غَلِيظ — root غ-ل-ظ. Its concrete sense is thickness, hardness: what is not thin, what is stiff. Ghilẓa — thickness. The Qurʾān uses the word in its concrete sense too: "a thick chain", "hard-hearted" (ghalīẓa'l-qalb at Āl ʿImrān 3/159).

The construction occurs in three places in the Qurʾān:

PlaceFor what
al-Nisāʾ 4/21Marriage — the pledge women take from men
al-Nisāʾ 4/154A pledge taken from a community
al-Aḥzāb 33/7The pledge taken from the prophets

That these three stand side by side is worth recording. As was recorded at al-Ṭalāq, marriage is one of three things the Qurʾān describes as a "thick word" — and the other two are prophethood and a collective covenant.

Describing a word as "thick" does this in the language: it makes the word measurable like an object. A thin word snaps easily; a thick word does not. That is, the verse depicts bindingness not as a matter of ethics but as a matter of material.

Five names and their order

The verse first uses a general expression (mina'l-nabiyyīn — from the prophets), then names five: you, Noah, Abraham, Moses, Jesus.

There are two points of word order:

One. The one addressed is named not in historical order but at the very head. Wa minka — "and from you" — comes before Noah, although Noah is named at the beginning of the chain of prophethood (as was recorded at Nūḥ). That is, the order is not chronological but rhetorical. The one being spoken to has been brought forward.

Two. This group of five recurs in the Qurʾān. The same five names occur together at al-Shūrā 42/13 as well — there it is said "He has laid down for you of religion what He enjoined upon Noah, and what We have revealed to you, and what We enjoined upon Abraham, Moses and Jesus". In both verses the same five names, in the same frame. It is common in the exegetical tradition to call this group ulu'l-ʿazm; the extent and the ground of the term are disputed, and no ruling is issued here.

And one further note: Jesus is named here too by the Qurʾān's invariable designation — ibn Maryam, "son of Mary". That the Qurʾān always ascribes him to his mother takes on a particular weight when it is read together with the fact that this comes immediately after the discussion of lineage in the fourth and fifth verses. Lineage is not something the Qurʾān passes over undiscussed in anyone's case.

لِّيَسْـَٔلَ ٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ عَن صِدْقِهِمْ — the one who will be asked

This sentence is the most striking place in the verse, and it is usually passed over quickly.

The sentence says: a pledge has been taken — so that the truthful may be asked about their truthfulness.

صِدْق — root ص-د-ق. Truthfulness; and the concrete side of the root is firmness: rumḥun ṣadq — a firm spear. From the same root ṣadaqa, ṣadāq (the bridal gift), taṣdīq, ṣiddīq.

Note: the one who is asked is the ṣādiq. The verse does not say "so that He may ask the liars about their lies". Those to whom the questioning is addressed are the truthful.

This is a reversal worth recording. The expected sequence was: a pledge was taken so that those who do not keep it may render account. Instead the verse says that it is those who keep it who are asked.

Several explanations are transmitted for this expression in classical exegesis:

ExplanationWhat it says
Responsibility for delivering the messageThe prophets will be asked whether they delivered the message
TestimonyThe answer of the truthful constitutes evidence against the other side
The raising of the measureTruthfulness is not an arrival but a state that is called to account

I record the third explanation particularly, because the word order of the verse supports it: in the sentence ṣādiqīn and ṣidqihim occur twice from the same root. That is, the question is framed not as "were you truthful?" but as "what became of your truthfulness?" Truthfulness is set down not as an adjective but as a work for which an account is rendered.

I record this reading as my own reading; its ground is the twofold repetition of the root.

Context: the last sentence of the eighth verse

"And He has prepared for the disbelievers a painful punishment."

The verse ends at two poles: on one side the truthfulness asked of the truthful, on the other the recompense prepared for those who cover. And this twofold structure is the herald of the siege section: from the ninth verse the same two sides will come on stage — those who keep their pledge (23) and those who cover (25).

What this says to the present

The weight of a word depends not on who gives it but on what it is given to.

The verse says that what makes a word "thick" is one of the parties. Put into today's language: the bindingness of an undertaking comes less from the intention of the one who gives it than from to whom the undertaking is given.

And the second measure is more concrete: truthfulness is itself something for which an account will be asked. The matter does not end when a person counts himself "honest"; the verse says that the honest too will be questioned. An attribute is not an excuse.


33/9

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ٱذْكُرُوا۟ نِعْمَةَ ٱللَّهِ عَلَيْكُمْ إِذْ جَآءَتْكُمْ جُنُودٌ فَأَرْسَلْنَا عَلَيْهِمْ رِيحًا وَجُنُودًا لَّمْ تَرَوْهَا وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ بَصِيرًا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanu'dhkurū niʿmata'llāhi ʿalaykum idh jāʾatkum junūdun fa-arsalnā ʿalayhim rīḥan wa junūdan lam tarawhā, wa kāna'llāhu bimā taʿmalūna baṣīrā

"O you who believe! Remember the favour of God upon you: when armies came against you and We sent against them a wind and armies you did not see. God sees what you do."

The opening of the siege section

From the ninth verse to the twenty-seventh a block of nineteen verses begins. And the opening word of the block is a command: udhkurū — remember.

This also says what the block will not do: the event will not be narrated, it will be recalled. The one addressed already knows the event. The work of the text is not to relate the event but to show what is to be read from it.

Indeed throughout the section no event at all is narrated in sequence. What is related is this: a coming, a wind, the state of the eyes, the state of the hearts, the sentences that were said, the increase of faith, the return in rage.

That is, the section is not a military but an inward record. I record this as my own reading; its ground is that not a single military movement is described in the section.

نِعْمَةَ ٱللَّهِ — the naming of it as "favour"

Root: ن-ع-م. Softness, ease; naʿīm, niʿma, anʿām (livestock — from their soft tread), nuʿmā.

And the naming of the event as a "favour" has the same structure as what was recorded at al-Fatḥ for a comparable situation: the name of a hardship is fixed from its outcome, not from how it looked at the time.

What the addressee lived through was a siege: hunger, cold, fear, the suspicion of betrayal. The verse calls this a "favour". And it gives its ground at once: the armies that came were dispersed by a wind that was sent.

But note: what is named a "favour" is not the outcome alone. The word order of the verse shows this: "remember the favour: when armies came against you" — the coming too is included in what is to be remembered. Afterwards the sūra will say that this siege sifted the believers (11: hunālika'btuliya'l-muʾminūn). That is, the favour takes in the sifting itself.

جُنُود — "armies"

Root: ج-ن-د. A thing gathered together, compacted; jund — a force gathered. For the concrete sense of the root the lexicographers mention the word janad (hard, stony ground); that which has been gathered and hardened.

The finding recorded at al-Fatḥ returns here to its source: jund does not mean "soldier"; it covers any kind of force gathered for a purpose — it need not be human. And this verse is the clearest evidence for that finding in the Qurʾān: the word occurs twice in the same sentence, and the second is used of the wind and the unseen ones.

The symmetry in the word order is worth recording:

What cameWhat was sent
The wordjunūdrīḥan wa junūdan
VisibilitySeenlam tarawhā — which you did not see
The verbjāʾatkum — came to youarsalnā ʿalayhim — We sent against them

The same word is used on both sides. The verse does not belittle the force of the other side — it calls that too junūd. But it sets against it something else bearing the same name.

فَأَرْسَلْنَا — the change of subject

The verse begins in the third person with "remember the favour of God", then suddenly moves to the first person plural: arsalnā — "We sent".

This is the iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address) so often seen in the Qurʾān. And its function here is this: to bring forward the agent of the verb. The sentence does not say "a wind blew"; it says "We sent".

And at the end of the verse it returns to the third person: wa kāna'llāhu. That is, the sentence describes a circle.

رِيحًا — the singular

Root: ر-و-ح. And under this root fall rīḥ (wind), rūḥ (spirit), rawḥ (ease, relief) and rāʾiḥa (scent). The common point: moving, carrying air.

That the word comes in the singular is recorded in classical exegesis. In the Qurʾān the wind comes generally in the plural (riyāḥ) in contexts of mercy, and generally in the singular (rīḥ) in contexts of punishment. Examples: "That He sends the winds as bearers of good news…" (al-Rūm 30/46riyāḥ); "So We sent upon them a howling wind" (Fuṣṣilat 41/16rīḥan ṣarṣaran).

This distinction should not be presented as a rule — there are exceptions to it in the Qurʾān. But it has been recorded by the lexicographers as a tendency, and here too the singular is used.

The verse does not give the quality of the wind: not its force, not its direction, not its duration. It says only that it was sent. The reports speak of a cold wind that tore up the tents; I give this detail with the note "it is transmitted" and do not make it a condition of the verse's meaning.

وَجُنُودًا لَّمْ تَرَوْهَا — "armies you did not see"

This is the place in the verse that must be read most carefully.

In classical exegesis it is widely said that this expression means the angels. This rests on the mention of angels elsewhere in the Qurʾān as an element of help (al-Anfāl 8/9, Āl ʿImrān 3/124-125).

But the wording of the verse gives no name, and this must be recorded. The only thing said is that the force sent was not seen.

And the form lam tarawhā must be dwelt on: the verb is not "cannot be seen" (lā turā) but "you did not see" (lam taraw). That is, the expression issues no ontological ruling about the invisibility of the thing; it says that the one addressed did not see it.

This distinction is worth recording, and I give it as my own reading: the verse says that the person inside the event cannot see the whole of what is helping him. The one who lived through the siege saw the wind; he did not see the order that sent the wind.

And this binds the ninth verse to the tenth: in the tenth verse it will be said that the eyes swerved. That is, within two verses the sūra touches twice on the matter of seeing — one the unseen help, the other the swerving gaze.

وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ بَصِيرًا — the verse-ending

بَصِير — root ب-ص-ر. To see; and beneath the root lies discernment (baṣīra).

The choice of the verse-ending agrees with the verse, and this is a fine example of the Qurʾān's consistency in choosing its verse-endings: throughout the verse the matter of seeing was treated (lam tarawhā), and the verse ends with the attribute Seeing. The one addressed could not see; the verse closes by saying who it is that sees.

Historical background

It is widely transmitted in the classical sources that this verse and what follows it came down after a combined siege directed at Medina in the fifth year of the Hijra. The main lines of the account were given in the introductory section of the sūra; no tribal name, no personal name and no numbers are given.

There is a historical observation that can be made independently of the text, and it is worth recording: the breaking up of coalitions besieging a city is a very familiar fact in military history. Coalitions are formed around a shared aim, but their costs are paid separately. The longer a siege lasts, the higher each component's own cost rises and the lower the value of the shared aim falls. The parting comes not from the fighting but from the duration.

This is an observation from the social sciences, not a claim of the verse. The verse ties the event to a wind and to what is unseen; I am recording here a historical pattern, not dressing the verse in an explanation. Per the note in Method that "no forced connection is made", I keep the two apart.


33/10

إِذْ جَآءُوكُم مِّن فَوْقِكُمْ وَمِنْ أَسْفَلَ مِنكُمْ وَإِذْ زَاغَتِ ٱلْأَبْصَٰرُ وَبَلَغَتِ ٱلْقُلُوبُ ٱلْحَنَاجِرَ وَتَظُنُّونَ بِٱللَّهِ ٱلظُّنُونَا۠

Idh jāʾūkum min fawqikum wa min asfala minkum wa idh zāghati'l-abṣāru wa balaghati'l-qulūbu'l-ḥanājira wa taẓunnūna bi'llāhi'l-ẓunūnā

"When they came upon you from above you and from below you; when the eyes swerved and the hearts reached the throats, and you entertained all manner of surmises about God."

The most concentrated descriptive verse in the sūra

This verse is the shortest and most concentrated place in which the Qurʾān describes a community under siege. There are four clauses, and all four look to the body: direction, eye, heart, surmise.

And the order is worth noting: it moves from outside inwards. First the place (from where did they come), then the eye (the organ that looks outward), then the heart (the organ within), then the surmise (what is not seen).

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the arrangement of the four clauses.

مِّن فَوْقِكُمْ وَمِنْ أَسْفَلَ مِنكُمْ — two directions

فَوْق — above. أَسْفَل — root س-ف-ل: to be below. Suflā — that which is lower.

Naming the two directions together conveys the completeness of the siege. One of the ways in Arabic of saying that a thing comes from every direction is to name two opposite directions — the remaining directions enter by implication.

In classical exegesis the geographical correspondence of these two directions is dwelt on, and it is transmitted that the besieging forces approached from two different sides of the city. I do not enter into detail; the wording of the verse gives only two directions.

But there is a linguistic note: min fawqikum is built as a construct, while min asfala minkum is built with a separate min. The lexicographers record this asymmetry; it has to do with asfal being a diptote (a noun that does not take certain inflectional endings). It produces no difference in meaning.

وَإِذْ زَاغَتِ ٱلْأَبْصَٰرُ — the swerving of the eyes

زَاغَ — root ز-ي-غ. To deviate from straight, to swerve, to slip out of place. The Qurʾān uses the root of the heart as well: "Those in whose hearts is deviation…" (Āl ʿImrān 3/7zaygh); "When they swerved, God made their hearts swerve" (al-Ṣaff 61/5).

And the use of the root here for the eye is striking. The word describes the eye's loss of focus: the gaze cannot fix on anything, it slides.

This is a physiologically accurate description of fear, and it is worth recording. Under intense threat the gaze loses its steadiness; as the eye tries to scan for the threat it can rest at no point. The verse records this not as a moral fault but as a state — indeed in the same verse the believers are not censured, and in the next verse it is said that "they were tested".

And the choice of the word abṣār links up with the verse-ending of the previous verse: the ninth verse ended with baṣīr. The same root, within two verses, with two different subjects: God is baṣīr, and the abṣār of the people swerve.

I record this link as my own reading; its ground is the repetition of the root in two consecutive verses.

وَبَلَغَتِ ٱلْقُلُوبُ ٱلْحَنَاجِرَ — the hearts reaching the throats

This expression was treated at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) at 40/18, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there:

  • حَنَاجِر — singular حَنْجَرَة: the throat.
  • The scene is bodily, and can be compared with the scene of the departing soul that rests on ḥulqūm (the gullet) at al-Wāqiʿa, 56/83.
  • Both scenes point to the place through which voice and breath pass.

Now the real work: the comparison of the two occurrences. The construction occurs in only two places in the Qurʾān, and the two are entirely different scenes.

Ghāfir 40/18al-Aḥzāb 33/10
Wordingal-qulūbu ladā'l-ḥanājirbalaghati'l-qulūbu'l-ḥanājir
Particle / verbladā — "beside, level with" (a nominal sentence)balagha — "reached, arrived at" (a verbal sentence)
The sceneThe resurrectionyawm al-āzifaA siege — a historical moment
TimeFuture; not yet happenedPast; happened and being recalled
Those addressedThose being warned (wa andhirhum)Those who believe (yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū)
The accompanying statekāẓimīn — swallowing, making no soundzāghati'l-abṣār — the eyes swerving
The outcomeThe reckoningibtilāʾ and zilzāl (11)

Three things emerge from this comparison, and I record all three:

One. The difference in the verb carries a difference in time. In Ghāfir a nominal sentence is used (with ladā) — a state is depicted, a fixed condition. In al-Aḥzāb a verb is used (balaghat) — a movement is described: the heart rose and arrived there. The resurrection scene is static, the siege scene is in motion.

Two. The same bodily state comes about from two different causes. In one the cause is the reckoning itself, in the other a military threat. And the Qurʾān uses the same expression for both. The meaning of this is: the Qurʾān describes the fear of the resurrection with a fear a person knows — and it also records an instance of that fear actually lived through in history. That is, not a metaphor but a scale: two intensities of the same state.

Three. What comes afterwards is different. In Ghāfir the scene is followed by swallowing (silence); in al-Aḥzāb it is followed by speech — from the twelfth verse onwards the sentences begin. At the resurrection no speech is left; under siege speech multiplies. And the whole diagnosis of the sūra will be built upon those utterances.

I record this third finding as my own reading.

وَتَظُنُّونَ بِٱللَّهِ ٱلظُّنُونَا۠ — "surmises about God"

Root: ظ-ن-ن. This root was treated in detail at al-Fatḥ (48/6, ẓanna'l-sawʾ) and at al-Ḥujurāt (49/12, ijtanibū kathīran mina'l-ẓann). I rely on that treatment.

What was recorded there: surmise is the zone between certainty and doubt — in Arabic it can mean both "to suppose" and (in some contexts) "to know for certain"; the context decides.

In this verse the word has three features:

One. The verb is imperfect (taẓunnūna). The three preceding clauses are perfect (jāʾūkum, zāghat, balaghat); this clause is imperfect. The word order conveys a continuity: the coming, the swerving, the reaching are each a moment; the surmising is an inner activity that runs on through those moments.

Two. Al-ẓunūnā — plural and with the definite article. "Surmises" — of every kind. Its coming with the article of definiteness (al-) carries the sense of surmises that are known, recognised. That is, the verse does not enumerate the content of the surmises but assumes that the one addressed knows them.

Three. The alif at the end of the word. Al-ẓunūnā — there is an alif at the end (likewise al-Rasūlā in verse 66 and al-Sabīlā in verse 67). This is one of the places where there is a difference of variant reading: some of the readers read this alif both in continuous recitation and at a pause, some only at a pause, some not at all. It does not change the meaning; it is a difference of reading bound up with the harmony of the verse-endings. In the script of the muṣḥaf the alif is written.

The most striking aspect of the verse

The verse records surmises entertained about God — and it does so in a section addressed to those who believe.

This must be recorded. The twelfth verse will separately relate what the hypocrites said; the tenth verse takes in everyone inside the address.

This attitude of the Qurʾān is consistent, and it was recorded at al-Baqara at 2/214: there too, at the point where the hardship reaches its limit, it was stated explicitly that the one who asks "when will God's help come?" is the messenger and those who believe with him, and the question was not censured.

The same thing happens here: the surmise is counted a fault but is not made a ground for excommunication. Indeed the next verse will name the event a test — that is, the state recorded is the sifting itself.

I record this as my own reading: the Qurʾān depicts the inward faltering of the moment of hardship not as something that takes a person out of faith, but as the place where faith is tried.


33/11

هُنَالِكَ ٱبْتُلِىَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ وَزُلْزِلُوا۟ زِلْزَالًا شَدِيدًا

Hunālika'btuliya'l-muʾminūna wa zulzilū zilzālan shadīdā

"There the believers were tested and shaken with a violent shaking."

A short verse, a heading for a block

A verse of eight words, but it closes the whole description of the preceding verse with a single name: this was an ibtilāʾ.

هُنَالِكَ — "there"

The adverb of far demonstration: "there, at that point". Hunā (here) → hunāka (there) → hunālika (right there — the furthest degree).

That the word conveys place and not time is worth recording. The verse does not say "then", it says "there". And this links up with the spatial description of the preceding verse: those who came from above and from below, a place besieged.

The lexicographers record that hunālika is sometimes used in the Qurʾān in a temporal sense too (example: "There every soul will experience what it sent ahead" — Yūnus 10/30). The two uses combine in this verse: the besieged place and the constricted moment are the same thing.

ٱبْتُلِىَ — root ب-ل-و

To try, to test; and the concrete sense of the root is to wear out: baliya'l-thawb — the garment wore out. Balāʾ — a trial; ibtilāʾ — a testing.

The "wearing out" sense of the root explains what a test is, and it is worth recording: to test a thing is to use it until it is worn and to see what holds. A test lays a cost upon the thing tested.

And that the verb comes in the passive: ubtuliya — "they were tested". The agent is not named. The verse does not explicitly name the one who tests; but in the context of the sūra there is no ambiguity. The passive form here stresses the position of the one addressed: to be the party tested is not to do something but to undergo something.

وَزُلْزِلُوا۟ زِلْزَالًا شَدِيدًا — a shaking

Root: ز-ل-ز-ل. A quadriliteral root formed by the repetition of two syllables — in Arabic such reduplicated roots generally convey a repeated movement: to shake, to jolt, to move out of place.

This root was treated as the name of a sūra at al-Zilzāl, and this very verse was already mentioned there as an example: "Here it is not the earth that is shaken but people — the situation during the siege of the Trench is being described. The root can slide from a physical shaking to a psychological one."

And the same verb was treated at al-Baqara, 2/214. It is essential to rely on that treatment, because the parallel between the two verses is striking.

al-Baqara 2/214al-Aḥzāb 33/11
Whoalladhīna khalaw min qablikum — those before youal-muʾminūn — the addressees themselves
TimePast generations; mentioned as an exampleThe moment the addressee is living through
The preceding stateal-baʾsāʾu wa'l-ḍarrāʾ — poverty and harmzāghati'l-abṣār, balaghati'l-qulūb — eye and heart
The verbzulzilūzulzilū zilzālan shadīdā
What was saidmatā naṣru'llāh — "when will God's help come?"taẓunnūna bi'llāhi'l-ẓunūnā — surmises
The answeralā inna naṣra'llāhi qarībhunālika'btuliya — a naming

What emerges from this comparison is this, and I record it:

Al-Baqara 2/214 was the theory of this verse. Al-Aḥzāb 33/11 is the moment in which that theory came about.

Al-Baqara had said: did you suppose you would enter the Garden without what came upon those before you coming upon you? And it had related that they were shaken. Al-Aḥzāb uses the same verb of the addressee himself. What al-Baqara said "will come upon you too" has come.

And there is a difference, and it too must be recorded: in al-Baqara the shaking was given without qualification (zulzilū); in al-Aḥzāb it is reinforced with a cognate accusative and an adjective: zulzilū zilzālan shadīdā.

مَفْعُول مُطْلَق (the cognate accusative) — the repetition of the verb's verbal noun in order to reinforce the verb. In English it corresponds to a construction such as "they were shaken with a shaking" or "shaken as never before". In Arabic this is one of the strongest forms of emphasis.

And on top of it comes an adjective: شَدِيد — root ش-د-د: to bind, to draw tight; from this "violent, harsh".

That is, the verse gives the shaking with a threefold emphasis: verb + verbal noun + adjective. The places where the Qurʾān uses all three together are few.

The function of the verse in the sūra

This verse is the sentence of diagnosis in the siege section, and it is what makes everything after it possible.

The tenth verse had described a state. The eleventh verse gives that state a name: ibtilāʾ. And the moment the name is given, the state ceases to be a fault and becomes a process.

And this agrees with the founding principle of the sūra, but works in the opposite direction. The fourth verse was saying that a name a person gives does not change reality. Here a name is given and that name does not change reality, it explains it — because the party who fixes the name is a different one.

I record this as my own reading.

One further note on word order: the verse says al-muʾminūn. The next verse will say al-munāfiqūna wa'lladhīna fī qulūbihim maraḍun. That is, the sifting is done between these two verses. The eleventh verse says that the believers were shaken; the twelfth relates what others said. The same shaking gives two different results — one is shaken and stands, the other is shaken and speaks.

What this says to the present

To be shaken is not to leave faith.

The verse says this plainly: the party that is shaken is named al-muʾminūn. The verse calls them by no other name.

And this comes out at the same place as what was recorded for 2/214 at al-Baqara: the question itself is not censured. The Qurʾān depicts the faltering of the moment of hardship not as the opposite of faith but as the cost of faith.

Its practical counterpart is this: a person's being shaken at a hard moment does not annul what he has carried up to that moment. The measure is not whether there was a shaking; it is what was done after the shaking. The sūra will show this in the twenty-second and twenty-third verses.


33/12

وَإِذْ يَقُولُ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقُونَ وَٱلَّذِينَ فِى قُلُوبِهِم مَّرَضٌ مَّا وَعَدَنَا ٱللَّهُ وَرَسُولُهُۥٓ إِلَّا غُرُورًا

Wa idh yaqūlu'l-munāfiqūna wa'lladhīna fī qulūbihim maraḍun mā waʿadana'llāhu wa rasūluhu illā ghurūrā

"And when the hypocrites and those in whose hearts is sickness were saying, 'God and His Messenger promised us nothing but delusion.'"

A note on the description of the hypocrite

The root ن-ف-ق and the phenomenon of hypocrisy were analysed at al-Munāfiqūn; a long section was also given to it at al-Baqara (2/8-20). I rely on those treatments here and do not repeat them.

Of what was recorded there, what is needed here:

  • The root is connected with the hidden second exit-hole in the burrow of the field mouse (nāfiqāʾ). Nifāq, by the word's own logic, is the state of having two doors.
  • The second mouth is not always open; it is broken through only when needed. Hypocrisy is not a continuous act but a possibility held in reserve.
  • These verses cannot be used today to identify particular persons or groups. The sūra gives the description of an attribute, and the attribute is by definition not visible from outside.

What does al-Aḥzāb add to al-Munāfiqūn and al-Baqara?

Al-Baqara was a psychological description, al-Munāfiqūn a behavioural one. Al-Aḥzāb gives a moment. It does not describe; it makes them speak. From the twelfth verse to the twentieth, sentences are relayed one after another:

VerseThe saying relayed
12"God and His Messenger promised us nothing but delusion"
13"O people of Yathrib, there is no place for you to stay, go back"
13"Our houses are exposed"
18"Come to us"
20(What passes within them) the supposition that the aḥzāb have not gone

Five sentences, and all five said inside a siege. This section of the sūra examines hypocrisy not as a concept but as what is said under pressure.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the section is built by the technique of direct quotation.

وَٱلَّذِينَ فِى قُلُوبِهِم مَّرَضٌ — the second group

The verse names two groups, and the distinction must be recorded: al-munāfiqūn and alladhīna fī qulūbihim maraḍ.

In classical exegesis it has been debated whether these are the same group or two different ones:

ViewIts ground
The same group, named twiceThe conjunction sometimes comes to list another attribute of the same thing; both display the same behaviour
Two separate groupsThe proper function of the conjunction is to distinguish; moreover the expression "sickness in the heart" may also cover one who has faith but a weak one

I do not impose a preference. But I record a datum of the text in favour of the second view: the sūra uses these same two expressions side by side in the sixtieth verse as well, and there it adds a third group (al-murjifūn). When three separate expressions are listed, it becomes a stronger possibility that the distinction is deliberate. This is not a preference but an observation.

مَرَض — root م-ر-ض. Sickness. This metaphor was treated at al-Baqara (2/10), and the finding recorded there was this: for the disbelievers a seal is used, for the hypocrites a sickness. A seal conveys closure, a sickness conveys progression — an untreated illness does not stay where it is.

And that finding is confirmed in this sūra: at the moment of the siege the sickness progresses and turns into speech.

مَّا وَعَدَنَا ٱللَّهُ وَرَسُولُهُۥٓ إِلَّا غُرُورًا — the structure of the sentence

A structure of restriction (ḥaṣr): mā … illā — "nothing other than…". The same pattern was treated at al-Mujādala.

And the pattern does a particularly hard piece of work here. The sentence does not say "the promise was not fulfilled"; it says the promise was nothing other. That is, what is denied is not the content of the promise but its nature.

غُرُور — root غ-ر-ر. And the concrete sense of the root must be dwelt on: to be deceived, to be heedless; and ghirra — inattention, heedlessness. Gharra — he deceived someone by exploiting his heedlessness.

The concrete side of the root: the lexicographers record that the word ghirr is used for "inexperienced, green" — one who has not yet learned to be deceived.

The Qurʾān uses the word in a characteristic place: "The life of this world is nothing but the goods of delusion" (Āl ʿImrān 3/185matāʿu'l-ghurūr); "Let the great deceiver (al-gharūr) not deceive you about God" (Luqmān 31/33).

And there is a reversal here, worth recording: the Qurʾān generally describes this world as deluding. In this sentence the same word is used of what has been promised. That is, those speaking turn the measure the Qurʾān sets exactly upside down: for them the deceiving party is the unseen promise, and the real party is the tangible situation.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the contrast between the word's general use in the Qurʾān and its use here.

The matter of the promise

There is a concrete expectation behind the sentence, and this is needed in order to understand the verse.

The sources transmit that a promise of victory or of expansion was voiced before and during the siege. I do not enter into detail. But the logic of the sentence needs no detail: there is a promise, the siege appears to show its opposite, and those speaking draw a conclusion from that appearance.

And this is, as a matter of logic, an error, and the error has a name: the hasty verdict. The situation in the middle of a process is read as the outcome of the process. The sūra will give the outcome in the twenty-fifth verse: the besiegers turned back in their rage.

But what the sūra does is not merely to say "they were wrong". In the twenty-second verse it will show that other people looking at the same scene drew exactly the opposite conclusion: "This is what God and His Messenger promised us."

Two groups see the same thing. One says "delusion", the other says "promise". And in both sentences the same word is used: وَعَدَ.

Verse 12Verse 22
WhoThe hypocrites and those with sickness in their heartsThe believers
What they sawThe same siegeThe same siege
What they saidmā waʿadana'llāhu… illā ghurūrāhādhā mā waʿadana'llāhu wa rasūluh
The outcomewa mā zādahum illā īmānan wa taslīmā

This is the sharpest contrast the sūra sets up, and it is the spine of the whole siege section. The ten verses between the two fill in the space between these two sentences.

And what must be recorded is this: the difference is not one of knowledge. Both sides know the same thing, see the same scene, live through the same danger. The difference lies in the conclusion drawn from the same data.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the two verses use the same verb (waʿada).

What this says to the present

The worst moment in the middle of a process is not the outcome of the process.

The error the verse records is as simple as that, and as familiar today. An assessment made at a moment of difficulty carries the pressure of that moment; and that pressure distorts the scale.

The real nicety in the verse's sentence is that those speaking are not lying. What they say fits their observation as of that moment: there is a siege, and the promise is nowhere in sight. The error lies not in the observation but in the haste to draw a verdict from the observation.


33/13

وَإِذْ قَالَت طَّآئِفَةٌ مِّنْهُمْ يَٰٓأَهْلَ يَثْرِبَ لَا مُقَامَ لَكُمْ فَٱرْجِعُوا۟ وَيَسْتَـْٔذِنُ فَرِيقٌ مِّنْهُمُ ٱلنَّبِىَّ يَقُولُونَ إِنَّ بُيُوتَنَا عَوْرَةٌ وَمَا هِىَ بِعَوْرَةٍ إِن يُرِيدُونَ إِلَّا فِرَارًا

Wa idh qālat ṭāʾifatun minhum yā ahla Yathriba lā muqāma lakum fa'rjiʿū, wa yastaʾdhinu farīqun minhumu'l-nabiyya yaqūlūna inna buyūtanā ʿawratun wa mā hiya bi-ʿawra, in yurīdūna illā firārā

"And when a party of them said, 'O people of Yathrib! There is no place for you to stay, go back.' And another company of them was asking leave of the Prophet, saying, 'Our houses are exposed.' They were not exposed; they wanted only to flee."

The anatomy of an excuse

This verse is one of the places where the Qurʾān lays bare most clearly the manufacture of excuses, and it deserves to be dwelt on in detail.

There are two separate groups and two separate tactics in the verse:

The first group (ṭāʾifa)The second group (farīq)
What it doesCalls out to othersAsks leave of the Prophet
Its addressyā ahla Yathrib
Its sentencelā muqāma lakum — "there is no place"inna buyūtanā ʿawratun — "our houses are open"
Its groundAn assessment of the situationPersonal necessity
The verse's answer— (passed over in silence)wa mā hiya bi-ʿawra — an open refusal
The diagnosisin yurīdūna illā firārā

That the two groups are named with two different words must be recorded.

طَآئِفَة — root ط-و-ف. To go round something (ṭawāf is from the same root). Ṭāʾifa — a cluster that circles round a thing; from this, "a band of people". In the root of the word there is circulating — not fixed, but in motion.

فَرِيق — root ف-ر-ق. To separate, to divide. Farīq — a company that has split off; firqa, furqān are from the same root. In the root of the word there is separating.

And the distribution of the two words over the two groups agrees with the sense of the verse: one circulates about and speaks (ṭāʾifa), the other asks leave in order to separate itself from the community (farīq). The words announce the behaviours in advance.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the concrete senses of the two roots.

يَٰٓأَهْلَ يَثْرِبَ — the use of the name

This is the only place in the Qurʾān where the name "Yathrib" occurs, and whose mouth it comes from matters: those calling for flight.

The city's name in the Qurʾān is al-Madīna, and it occurs under that name in the sixtieth verse of this sūra. In the same sūra, the same city, two different names.

Does this mean anything? Classical exegesis draws attention to the distinction. I keep within what the wording gives and record this as a datum of the text: the sūra names the city by its old name in the mouths of those calling for flight, and as al-Madīna in its own narration.

Beyond this I frame no ruling — there is no negative judgement about the name Yathrib itself in the wording of the verse.

A linguistic note: the word ahl means "the inhabitants of a place, the possessors of a thing", and in the thirty-third verse of this sūra it will come again in an entirely different construction: ahl al-bayt. The same root, an entirely different extent.

لَا مُقَامَ لَكُمْ — "there is no place to stay"

مُقَام — root ق-و-م. To rise, to stand, to be fixed.

And here there is a difference of variant reading, and it changes the meaning:

ReadingPatternMeaning
مُقَام (muqām, with ḍamma)Noun of place / mīmī verbal noun, from Form IV (iqāma)"There is no place or possibility of residing" — of staying on
مَقَام (maqām, with fatḥa)Noun of place, from the bare root (qiyām)"There is no place to stand" — a place of standing upright

Both readings are found among the readers. The difference in sense is fine, and both fit the context: one says "there is no staying here", the other "there is no holding on here". I do not impose a preference.

The rhetorical force of the sentence lies here: the negative particle , at the head of a nominal sentence, conveys the negation of the genus (the of generic negation) — "no place of any kind". That is, the sentence claims not a possibility but a certainty.

And the verse gives no answer to this sentence. While the second group is answered (wa mā hiya bi-ʿawra), the first is not. This is a fact of word order and can be read in two ways: either the falsity of the sentence will be exposed by the event itself (verse 25), or the verse makes its real diagnosis by way of the second group. I do not speak with certainty here.

إِنَّ بُيُوتَنَا عَوْرَةٌ — the word of the excuse

This is the most striking word in the verse.

عَوْرَة — root ع-و-ر. And the semantic cluster of the root is wide; what joins all of it is a lack, an opening, an absence of protection:

WordMeaning
أَعْوَر (aʿwar)Blind in one eye — lacking on one side
عَارِيَة (ʿāriya)A thing borrowed — not permanently owned
عَوْرَة (ʿawra)What must be covered, what must not be left exposed; and the unprotected, open side of a structure
عَوَار (ʿawār)A flaw, a defect in goods

The sense of the word in this verse is concrete: the houses are undefended — their walls low, their doors weak, or unprotected in the layout of the settlement.

The root occurs only here in this sūra. In Sūrat al-Nūr, by contrast (24/31 and 24/58), it occurs in the context of privacy; there too the same family of senses is at work: what must be covered, what must not be left exposed.

And the choice of the word constitutes the force of the excuse. Those speaking do not say "we are afraid". They put their families forward. Because the word ʿawra carries both defencelessness and privacy at once, the excuse takes on a moral covering: "we are thinking not of ourselves but of those we have left behind."

This is the most important thing that can be said about the anatomy of an excuse, and I record it: a good excuse makes the speaker look like the protector not of his own interest but of someone else.

The finding recorded at al-Fatḥ for the excuse at 48/11 (shaghalatnā amwālunā wa ahlūnā — "our possessions and our families kept us busy") — that the excuse makes the person passive — goes one step further here: here the excuse does not merely make the person passive, it makes him look self-sacrificing.

وَمَا هِىَ بِعَوْرَةٍ — the form of the refusal

The verse refuses the excuse directly, and the language of the refusal is striking.

The structure مَابِـ: in the Ḥijāzī dialect the that governs like laysa is reinforced by taking a bāʾ at the head of its predicate. The same structure (mā hunna ummahātihim) was treated at al-Mujādala.

And the parallel between the verses is worth recording:

PlaceThe sentenceWhat is denied
al-Mujādala 58/2mā hunna ummahātihimThe claim "my wife is my mother"
al-Aḥzāb 33/4mā jaʿala… azwājakum… ummahātikumThe same claim, with the agent named
al-Aḥzāb 33/13wa mā hiya bi-ʿawraThe claim "my house is exposed"

All three do the same work: they annul a reality established by speech with a statement of fact. And all three are in the same sūra or in the same family of subjects.

This is the application of the sūra's founding principle within the siege section, and I record it: the fourth verse had said "speech does not establish reality"; the thirteenth applies the same principle to an excuse. An excuse too is a piece of speech, and it too stays in the mouth.

إِن يُرِيدُونَ إِلَّا فِرَارًا — the diagnosis

Again a structure of ḥaṣr: in … illā. "They want nothing but to flee."

فِرَار — root ف-ر-ر. To flee. On the concrete sense of the root the lexicographers record this: farra'l-dābba — he examined the animal's teeth (he opened its mouth to tell its age). From this comes the sense "to bring to light", and its link with fleeing is that the one who flees exposes himself.

This derivation is not certain; some lexicographers assign the two senses to separate roots. I record it but build no meaning upon it.

What the sentence does: the verse names the desire behind the excuse. And that it is able to do so comes from the distinction the sūra has been drawing from the outset: the word that leaves the mouth and the intention in the heart are different things (verse 5: mā taʿammadat qulūbukum).

That is, the measure laid down in the fifth verse — liability lies in the intention of the heart — turns in the thirteenth verse into an instrument of diagnosis. I record this as my own reading.

What this says to the present

Excuses have a recognisable structure, and the verse shows that structure.

There are three elements:

One. An excuse rests on something that could be true. The houses really could have been undefended. The force of an excuse comes not from its not being a lie but from its standing on verifiable ground.

Two. An excuse frees a person not from responsibility but from choice. Saying "I am fleeing" is a choice; saying "my house is exposed" is a necessity. The same act becomes two different things in two different sentences.

Three. An excuse puts someone else forward. He is asking not for himself but for his family.

And the verse's answer annuls all three elements with a single sentence: wa mā hiya bi-ʿawra. Once the ground is refuted, the structure falls.

One further note, per the method (Method): the verse does not say who it was that spoke this sentence — it gives no name, no tribe. And as recorded at al-Munāfiqūn this is a deliberate choice: the description lasts, the exposure passes. This verse cannot be used today to identify anyone; it can only be read in order to recognise the anatomy of an excuse — and one's own excuses first.


33/14-15

وَلَوْ دُخِلَتْ عَلَيْهِم مِّنْ أَقْطَارِهَا ثُمَّ سُئِلُوا۟ ٱلْفِتْنَةَ لَءَاتَوْهَا وَمَا تَلَبَّثُوا۟ بِهَآ إِلَّا يَسِيرًا · وَلَقَدْ كَانُوا۟ عَٰهَدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ مِن قَبْلُ لَا يُوَلُّونَ ٱلْأَدْبَٰرَ وَكَانَ عَهْدُ ٱللَّهِ مَسْـُٔولًا

Wa law dukhilat ʿalayhim min aqṭārihā thumma suʾilu'l-fitnata la-ātawhā wa mā talabbathū bihā illā yasīrā · Wa laqad kānū ʿāhadu'llāha min qablu lā yuwallūna'l-adbār, wa kāna ʿahdu'llāhi masʾūlā

"If the city had been entered upon them from all its sides and they had then been asked for fitna, they would surely have done it, and would have delayed over it but little. · Yet they had earlier given God their pledge: that they would not turn their backs. And the pledge given to God is asked about."

The fourteenth verse: a supposition

The verse sets up a hypothetical condition: law — the particle of a condition that did not come about. This particle was treated at al-Ḥujurāt 49/5: law generally conveys a condition that has not come about.

And the function of the condition is worth recording: by supposing something that did not happen, the verse measures what a group was ready for. This is not an accusation; it is a test of durability.

أَقْطَار — singular قُطْر. Root: ق-ط-ر. The edge, the side, the region of a thing. Quṭr — a diameter, the line between two opposite points of a circle; and one side of a place. "If you can pass beyond the aqṭār of the heavens and the earth, then pass" (al-Raḥmān 55/33) — there too the same word means "the sides, the limits", and it was treated at al-Raḥmān.

دُخِلَتْ — passive. "Had been entered". The agent is not named; the verse does not make it its subject who would enter.

ٱلْفِتْنَة — root ف-ت-ن. The concrete sense of the root is to melt metal in fire and separate out what is pure: fatana'l-dhahab — he put the gold into the fire. From this come both the sense "a trial" and the sense "turmoil, sedition".

The sense of the word in this verse has been debated in classical exegesis:

ExplanationWhat is meant
Turning back from religionIf they had been asked to give up faith
Civil war / fighting against the communityIf they had been asked to change sides against their own community
General seditionIf they had been asked to take part in any work of disorder

I do not impose a preference. The wording of the verse gives the word with the definite article (al-fitna), that is, it points to something the addressee knows; but it does not open up its content.

وَمَا تَلَبَّثُوا۟ بِهَآ إِلَّا يَسِيرًاتَلَبَّثَ, root ل-ب-ث: to stay in a place, to linger, to wait. Yasīr — little, easy.

The sentence says: they would not have delayed. That is, the matter is not one of putting up a resistance and giving way in the end; it is the absence of any resistance at all.

And this completes the diagnosis of the thirteenth verse: there the intention behind the excuse was determined (to flee); here the depth of that intention is measured.

The fifteenth verse: the pledge recalled

وَلَقَدْ كَانُوا۟ عَٰهَدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ مِن قَبْلُ — "they had earlier given God their pledge".

عَهْد — root ع-ه-د. To turn back to a thing again and again, to watch over it, not to neglect it. Taʿāhada — he inspected a thing regularly. The concrete sense of the root is a continuity, and from this comes the sense "covenant, agreement": a pledge is not something said once and left, but something continually watched over.

And this joins with the note at the end of the verse: wa kāna ʿahdu'llāhi masʾūlā — "the pledge given to God is asked about." The root itself was already saying that it would be asked about: an ʿahd is a thing watched over.

The link with the seventh verse: at the head of the sūra a mīthāqan ghalīẓā had been taken from the prophets, and its ground was "so that the truthful may be asked about their truthfulness". In the fifteenth verse the same structure is repeated for ordinary people: a pledge has been given and will be asked about.

That is, the sūra begins the idea of a covenant with the prophets and brings it down to the community. I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the two verses set up the same frame (pledge + being asked).

لَا يُوَلُّونَ ٱلْأَدْبَٰرَ — the content of the pledge given

يُوَلُّونَ — root و-ل-ي. It meets us for the third time in this sūra (mawālī in verse 5, awlā in verse 6, yuwallūn here).

And the "turning towards" sense of the root works here in reverse: wallā, in Form II, means to turn one's back, to turn away. That the root goes in two directions — both approaching and departing — is seen in three separate words in this sūra.

VerseWordDirection
5mawālīkumNearness — a bond
6awlāNearness — precedence
15yuwallūna'l-adbārDeparture — turning the back

I record this web as my own reading; its ground is that the three words are from the same root.

ٱلْأَدْبَٰر — singular دُبُر. Root: د-ب-ر. The back, the end of a thing. Tadbīr is from the same root: to think of the back (the outcome) of a matter. This root was treated at Muḥammad.

The construction is a recurring pattern in the Qurʾān in the context of war: "Whoever turns his back that day…" (al-Anfāl 8/16).

وَكَانَ عَهْدُ ٱللَّهِ مَسْـُٔولًا — the verse-ending

مَسْـُٔول — root س-أ-ل. That which is asked about. And that the word comes in the passive participle is worth noting: what will be asked about is the pledge. Not the person.

This is a point of word order and it carries meaning: in Arabic it could equally have been said "they will be asked about it". Instead the verse makes the pledge the subject. The pledge becomes an object called to account.

This pattern is used elsewhere in the Qurʾān too: "And fulfil the covenant; the covenant will be asked about" (al-Isrāʾ 17/34inna'l-ʿahda kāna masʾūlā). The same structure, the same word.

What this says to the present

The measure of the fourteenth verse is uncomfortable and true: a person's durability is measured not by the size of the pressure he has met, but by looking one step beyond it.

The verse supposes a situation that did not come about and says what would have happened under that supposition. That is, the measure lies not in what was lived through but in what could be lived through.

This is something a person cannot know about himself, and the verse gives it not as a warning but as a record. No one knows what he will do under the next pressure; the only thing known is what pledge was given.

And the measure of the fifteenth verse comes out of this: durability cannot be measured, but the pledge is on record. And that is what will be asked about.


33/16-17

قُل لَّن يَنفَعَكُمُ ٱلْفِرَارُ إِن فَرَرْتُم مِّنَ ٱلْمَوْتِ أَوِ ٱلْقَتْلِ وَإِذًا لَّا تُمَتَّعُونَ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا · قُلْ مَن ذَا ٱلَّذِى يَعْصِمُكُم مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ إِنْ أَرَادَ بِكُمْ سُوٓءًا أَوْ أَرَادَ بِكُمْ رَحْمَةً وَلَا يَجِدُونَ لَهُم مِّن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ وَلِيًّا وَلَا نَصِيرًا

Qul lan yanfaʿakumu'l-firāru in farartum mina'l-mawti awi'l-qatli wa idhan lā tumattaʿūna illā qalīlā · Qul man dha'lladhī yaʿṣimukum mina'llāhi in arāda bikum sūʾan aw arāda bikum raḥma, wa lā yajidūna lahum min dūni'llāhi waliyyan wa lā naṣīrā

"Say: If you flee from death or from being killed, fleeing will not profit you; and then you will be given enjoyment but a little. · Say: Who is it that can protect you from God if He wills harm for you, or if He wills mercy for you? They will find for themselves, apart from God, neither friend nor helper."

The arithmetic of flight

In the thirteenth verse the diagnosis had been made: in yurīdūna illā firārā. The sixteenth verse takes the same word and does a piece of arithmetic: does fleeing work?

And the verse's answer is not moral but arithmetical. It does not say "fleeing is bad". It says "it will not profit you".

نَفَعَ — root ن-ف-ع. To yield benefit; the opposite of ḍarar (ض-ر-ر), harm.

لَّن — the particle that negates the future absolutely: "never".

إِن فَرَرْتُم مِّنَ ٱلْمَوْتِ أَوِ ٱلْقَتْلِ — two separate things

The verse uses two words, and the two are different:

WordRootWhat
ٱلْمَوْتم-و-تDeath — an end that comes of itself
ٱلْقَتْلق-ت-لBeing killed — the act of an agent

The function of the distinction is this: the one who flees is fleeing the second. By setting the two side by side the verse says that what is being fled from is not a kind but an end. Fleeing the second does not remove the first.

وَإِذًا لَّا تُمَتَّعُونَ إِلَّا قَلِيلًامُتْعَة / تَمْتِيع, root م-ت-ع: to derive benefit from a thing; and matāʿ — goods enjoyed temporarily.

The root already contains transience — and the verse adds to it qalīlā (a little). That is, what flight gains is a small quantity of something that is transient in the very root of the word.

The sentence draws up an account, and I record it: what is obtained by flight is, at best, a slight prolongation of something already transient. The verse does not forbid flight; it calculates its profit.

مَن ذَا ٱلَّذِى يَعْصِمُكُم — the interrogative pattern

مَن ذَا ٱلَّذِى — a strong interrogative pattern in Arabic; "who is it that…" It is used for questions that have no answer (the rhetorical interrogative).

عَصَمَ — root ع-ص-م. And the concrete sense of the root is to hold, to grip fast: iʿtaṣama bi'l-ḥabl — he clung to the rope. ʿIṣma — being protected. Maʿṣūm — the one protected.

The concrete sense of the root builds the picture of the verse: the verse does not say "who will defend you"; it says "who will hold you". The one who flees is going from one place to another; the verse looks for a hand that will hold him.

إِنْ أَرَادَ بِكُمْ سُوٓءًا أَوْ أَرَادَ بِكُمْ رَحْمَةً — the breaking of the symmetry

This is the finest point in the verse, and it is usually passed over quickly.

The sentence names two possibilities: harm and mercy. But the question fits only one of them. The question "who will protect you from Him?" makes sense for harm; for mercy it makes none — nobody wants to be protected from mercy.

Several explanations are given for this asymmetry in classical exegesis:

ExplanationWhat it says
The mention of the opposite (muqābala)In Arabic the opposite of a thing is named in order to complete the picture; the ruling belongs to the first
The second verb attached to an implied question"Or if He wills mercy for you, who can prevent it?" — the question is implicitly repeated
The widening of the scopeThe sentence means "nothing can decide apart from Him"; by naming the two extremes the whole field is closed

The third explanation is supported by the sentence at the end of the verse: "They will find for themselves, apart from God, neither friend nor helper." Two more words: walī and naṣīr.

I do not impose a preference. But I record this: the naming of the second possibility (mercy) changes the tone of the verse. If the sentence had said only "you cannot escape", it would have been a threat. With the addition of mercy the sentence turns into a statement of scope: flight is a flight from the good as much as from the bad.

I record this reading as my own reading.

وَلِيًّا وَلَا نَصِيرًا — again the root و-ل-ي (for the fourth time in this sūra) and the root ن-ص-ر. The difference between the two: walī is protection born of nearness, naṣīr is help in act. One a position, the other an action.

What this says to the present

The verse gives flight not a moral but a calculated answer, and this is a method worth recording.

There are two ways of keeping a person in a hard place: to say that fleeing is bad, or to show that fleeing does not work. The verse chooses the second.

And its ground stands in the verse's own logic: flight carries an assumption about where the thing fled from is. The person assumes that the danger is in one place and not in another. The verse removes that assumption.

Its present-day form is this: what is gained by fleeing a difficulty is almost always measurable and almost always small — illā qalīlā. Flight does not solve the matter; it postpones it and raises its cost.


33/18-19

قَدْ يَعْلَمُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمُعَوِّقِينَ مِنكُمْ وَٱلْقَآئِلِينَ لِإِخْوَٰنِهِمْ هَلُمَّ إِلَيْنَا وَلَا يَأْتُونَ ٱلْبَأْسَ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا · أَشِحَّةً عَلَيْكُمْ فَإِذَا جَآءَ ٱلْخَوْفُ رَأَيْتَهُمْ يَنظُرُونَ إِلَيْكَ تَدُورُ أَعْيُنُهُمْ كَٱلَّذِى يُغْشَىٰ عَلَيْهِ مِنَ ٱلْمَوْتِ فَإِذَا ذَهَبَ ٱلْخَوْفُ سَلَقُوكُم بِأَلْسِنَةٍ حِدَادٍ أَشِحَّةً عَلَى ٱلْخَيْرِ أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ لَمْ يُؤْمِنُوا۟ فَأَحْبَطَ ٱللَّهُ أَعْمَٰلَهُمْ وَكَانَ ذَٰلِكَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ يَسِيرًا

Qad yaʿlamu'llāhu'l-muʿawwiqīna minkum wa'l-qāʾilīna li-ikhwānihim halumma ilaynā, wa lā yaʾtūna'l-baʾsa illā qalīlā · Ashiḥḥatan ʿalaykum, fa-idhā jāʾa'l-khawfu raʾaytahum yanẓurūna ilayka tadūru aʿyunuhum ka'lladhī yughshā ʿalayhi mina'l-mawt, fa-idhā dhahaba'l-khawfu salaqūkum bi-alsinatin ḥidādin ashiḥḥatan ʿala'l-khayr, ulāʾika lam yuʾminū fa-aḥbaṭa'llāhu aʿmālahum, wa kāna dhālika ʿala'llāhi yasīrā

"God knows those among you who hold others back and those who say to their brothers, 'come to us'. They come to the fighting but little. · They are grudging towards you. When fear comes you see them looking at you, their eyes rolling like one overcome by the swoon of death. And when the fear has gone they lash you with sharp tongues, grudging of any good. Those have not believed, and God has brought their deeds to nothing. That is easy for God."

The most detailed description of behaviour in the sūra

These two verses are the psychological summit of the siege section. And what is striking is this: the verse does not conduct an interrogation of belief; it records a series of behaviours.

Five behaviours are enumerated, and all five are observable:

1. Holding others back (muʿawwiqīn). 2. Calling their brothers (halumma ilaynā). 3. Coming to the fighting but little. 4. Freezing and staring at the moment of fear. 5. Speaking with a sharp tongue once the fear has passed.

At the end there is a ruling (lam yuʾminū), but the road leading to the ruling is entirely behavioural. I record this as my own reading.

ٱلْمُعَوِّقِينَ — those who hold back

Root: ع-و-ق. To delay a matter, to obstruct, to hold back. ʿĀʾiqa — an obstacle; taʿawwuq — delay.

Pattern: the active participle of Form II (muʿawwiq). This form generally conveys intensity and repetition. That is, the word does not mean "one who obstructs once" but one who is continually occupied with the work of obstructing.

مِنكُمْ — "from among you". This note is important and, per the method (Method), must be stressed: the verse says that those who hold back are from within the community. That is, not a threat coming from outside; a mechanism working from within.

And precisely for that reason these verses cannot be used as an instrument of identification. What is from within is not visible from without. The measure recorded at al-Munāfiqūn holds here too.

هَلُمَّ إِلَيْنَا — the sentence of the call

هَلُمَّ is in Arabic a noun-verb (a word carrying verbal meaning but not inflected like a verb): "come, come here". In the Ḥijāzī dialect it is used without distinction of singular and plural; in the Tamīmī dialect it is inflected.

The choice of the word is worth noting: short, warm, inviting. Not a command but a call.

And those the call addresses: li-ikhwānihim — "to their brothers". The verse records that those calling use the language of brotherhood.

This shows how the holding back works, and is worth recording: no one says "leave it, run". What is said is "come to us". That is, the holding back is presented not as a call to abandon but as a call to join. The person is not leaving a place; he is being invited to another.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the direction of the verb (ilaynā — towards us, not away from him).

ٱلْبَأْس — "the fighting"

Root: ب-أ-س. Violence, hardship, difficulty. It occurred at al-Baqara 2/214 as al-baʾsāʾ (poverty, hardship coming from outside) and was treated there. Baʾs — the violence of war; baʾīs — severe.

Using this word in place of "war" names war not as an event but as a violence.

أَشِحَّةً عَلَيْكُمْ — root ش-ح-ح

This word is the centre of the verse, and it occurs twice.

Root: ش-ح-ح. And the sense of the root is something sharper than the English "miserliness". The definition the lexicographers record is this: shuḥḥ is miserliness combined with greed — that is, both not giving what one has and wanting what another has.

WordThe difference
بُخْل (bukhl)Not giving what one has
شُحّ (shuḥḥ)Not giving what one has + wanting what another has; and this becoming a settled trait

In the classical dictionaries the difference of shuḥḥ from bukhl is explained by its having become a disposition. Bukhl is a behaviour, shuḥḥ a character.

Its other occurrences in the Qurʾān show the weight of the word:

  • "And whoever is guarded against the shuḥḥ of his own soul — it is they who attain deliverance"وَمَن يُوقَ شُحَّ نَفْسِهِۦ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْمُفْلِحُونَ (al-Ḥashr 59/9; al-Taghābun 64/16). This verse was treated at al-Ḥashr and at al-Taghābun.
  • "Souls have been made ready for shuḥḥ" (al-Nisāʾ 4/128wa uḥḍirati'l-anfusu'l-shuḥḥ).

And in this verse the word occurs twice, with two different objects:

PlaceThe constructionGrudging towards what
The beginning of verse 19ashiḥḥatan ʿalaykumTowards you — not joining, not lending support
The end of verse 19ashiḥḥatan ʿala'l-khayrTowards the good — in the context of asking for a share of the spoils

The same word frames the verse from its two ends. And what lies between? The coming and the going of fear.

This is the most elegant structure in the verse, and I record it: the shuḥḥ does not change; the only thing that changes is the presence of fear. When fear comes the shuḥḥ appears as freezing, when fear goes it appears as aggressive speech. That is, the verse says that two different behaviours come out of a single disposition.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the repetition of the word at the two ends of the verse.

Note: the root ش-ح-ح had not been treated in detail earlier in this commentary; it is opened up here. The word had been touched on in the contexts of al-Ḥashr 59/9 and al-Taghābun 64/16.

تَدُورُ أَعْيُنُهُمْ — the rolling of the eyes

دَارَ — root د-و-ر. To turn, to go round. Dāʾira, dawr, dār (a house — an enclosed place) are from the same root.

And the link of this description with the tenth verse is direct:

VerseWhoThe eye
33/10Everyone under siege, believers includedzāghati'l-abṣār — the eyes swerved
33/19The muʿawwiqīntadūru aʿyunuhum — their eyes roll

Both verbs describe the eye's loss of focus. But there is a difference, and the difference must be recorded:

  • Zāghait deviated, it slid. A single swerve.
  • Dārait turned, it went round. A continuous, circular movement.

And the verse states the second difference openly: yanẓurūna ilayka — "they are looking at you". In the tenth verse the gaze had no direction; here it has one: turned towards the Prophet.

That is, the same physiological state describes two different things in two different places. In the tenth verse, fear itself; here, an expectation inside the fear. The gaze is looking for deliverance in a person.

I record this distinction as my own reading; its ground is the difference between the two verbs (zāgha / dāra) and the note ilayka.

كَٱلَّذِى يُغْشَىٰ عَلَيْهِ مِنَ ٱلْمَوْتِ — the comparison

The root غ-ش-ي was treated at al-Layl, and this verse was already mentioned there as an example: "Besides the night's covering, the Qurʾān uses this root for the overspreading of fear and of the loss of consciousness." I rely on that treatment.

The concrete sense of the root is to cover, to overspread. Ghishāwa — a veil. Yughshā ʿalayh — a covering came over him; that is, he fainted.

The picture of the comparison: a person taken by the swoon of death. The eyes open, but not seeing; the body there, but absent.

And the choice of the comparison agrees with the context of the verse: the sixteenth verse had said that fleeing from death would not work. The nineteenth verse shows that those who want to flee are already in a state resembling death. What they flee from is upon them as they flee.

I record this as my own reading.

سَلَقُوكُم بِأَلْسِنَةٍ حِدَادٍ — sharp tongues

سَلَقَ — root س-ل-ق. On the concrete sense of the word the lexicographers record several things: salaqa'l-laḥm — he threw the meat into boiling water (he scalded it); salaqa bi-lisānih — he wounded someone with his tongue, he was harsh with him.

What links the "scalding" sense of the root with the sense "to hurt with the tongue" is heat. Speech burns where it touches.

This word occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

حِدَاد — singular حَدِيد. Root: ح-د-د. To be sharp; a limit. Ḥadīd — iron (treated as the name of a sūra at al-Ḥadīd); ḥadd — a limit, a penalty; ḥādd — sharp.

That is, the verse gives the tongue two qualities: scalding and sharp. One is heat, the other cutting. The Qurʾān likens the way speech does harm to two separate physical acts.

And a link must be made with al-Ḥujurāt: that sūra was from beginning to end about wounding with speech (mockery, nicknames, backbiting, surmise). Al-Aḥzāb touches the same subject here but from a different angle: it records when speech rises — after the danger has passed.

فَإِذَا جَآءَ ٱلْخَوْفُفَإِذَا ذَهَبَ ٱلْخَوْفُ — two conditions, two behaviours

The word order of the verse sets up a symmetry:

ConditionBehaviourDirection
jāʾa'l-khawf — fear cametadūru aʿyunuhum — the eyes rollWithdrawal inward, freezing
dhahaba'l-khawf — fear wentsalaqūkum bi-alsinatin ḥidādAttack outward

And the bond between the two behaviours is established by the verse's final diagnosis: ashiḥḥatan ʿala'l-khayr.

In classical exegesis the setting of this expression is the claim laid to the gain obtained after the danger has passed. That is: absent at the moment of danger, foremost at the moment of division.

And this is an observation about human behaviour, and it is recognisable today too: the one who does not carry the risk is the most insistent about sharing the outcome. The verse records this not as a moral lesson but as a pattern.

أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ لَمْ يُؤْمِنُوا۟ — where the ruling stands

At the end the verse issues a ruling: lam yuʾminū — "they have not believed".

A note is needed on how this ruling is to be read.

One. The ruling concerns those who bear the attributes enumerated in this verse. Per the method (Method): this is not the name of a group but the description of an attribute.

Two. The ruling is a ruling God gives about an inward state, not a conclusion people may draw. At the head of the verse it had already said "God knows" (qad yaʿlamu'llāh). That is, the knowing party has been stated explicitly.

Three. This does not mean that one person may issue the same ruling about another. The word order of the verse itself prevents it: a section that begins with yaʿlamu'llāh ends with lam yuʾminū. The subject of the ruling has been set at the outset.

فَأَحْبَطَ ٱللَّهُ أَعْمَٰلَهُمْthe root ح-ب-ط. The concrete sense the lexicographers record is striking: ḥabiṭati'l-dābba — the animal ate a harmful plant, its belly swelled and it died. That is, ḥabṭ is fullness seen from outside and death seen from inside.

This sense of the root fits the verse exactly: the deeds are there, they are visible; but they are empty inside. This root was treated at Muḥammad.

What this says to the present

There are two measures, and both are concrete.

One. The two faces of shuḥḥ. The verse shows that a single disposition produces two opposite behaviours: withdrawal at the moment of danger, a claim of right at the moment of safety. And what joins the two is that the person exposes himself to no cost at all.

Its present-day counterpart is easily seen inside a shared undertaking, a team, a family: the one who is invisible at the moment of risk and the loudest at the moment of division. The verse binds these two states with a single word.

Two. The moment when the voice rises. The verb salaqūkum comes after the fear has gone. And this is a note about when speech hardens: the sharpest form of criticism most often comes after the danger has passed.

This is not a prohibition of criticism. What the verse records is not the content of the criticism but its timing: the voice that stayed silent at the moment of danger sharpening afterwards.


33/20

يَحْسَبُونَ ٱلْأَحْزَابَ لَمْ يَذْهَبُوا۟ وَإِن يَأْتِ ٱلْأَحْزَابُ يَوَدُّوا۟ لَوْ أَنَّهُم بَادُونَ فِى ٱلْأَعْرَابِ يَسْـَٔلُونَ عَنْ أَنۢبَآئِكُمْ وَلَوْ كَانُوا۟ فِيكُم مَّا قَٰتَلُوٓا۟ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا

Yaḥsabūna'l-aḥzāba lam yadhhabū, wa in yaʾti'l-aḥzābu yawaddū law annahum bādūna fi'l-aʿrābi yasʾalūna ʿan anbāʾikum, wa law kānū fīkum mā qātalū illā qalīlā

"They suppose the confederated groups have not gone. And if those groups were to come again, they would wish to be out in the desert among the bedouin, asking from afar for news of you. Even if they were among you they would fight but little."

The verse in which the sūra's name occurs

The word ٱلْأَحْزَاب occurs twice in this verse and once in the twenty-second. The sūra takes its name from here.

And that the word comes with the definite article (al-) is worth noting: groups the addressee knows and recognises. The verse is not introducing them, it is recalling them.

يَحْسَبُونَلَمْ يَذْهَبُوا۟ — the persistence of fear

حَسِبَ — root ح-س-ب. To count, to reckon; and from this "to suppose" — to make a reckoning in the mind.

The state the sentence describes is a psychological fact worth recording: the danger has passed, but the fear has not. The person still behaves as though the threat were there.

And this may look like a contradiction with the nineteenth verse — there it was said that the fear had gone and the tongues had sharpened. There is no contradiction; the two verses speak of two different layers: the outward behaviour shows that the fear has gone (19), while the inward reckoning still counts the threat (20).

That is, the verse says this: the courage of the tongue and the reckoning within are not the same thing. I record it as my own reading.

يَوَدُّوا۟ لَوْ أَنَّهُم بَادُونَ فِى ٱلْأَعْرَابِ — the position desired

وَدَّ — root و-د-د. To love, to wish for. Wudd — love; al-Wadūd — one of the names of God.

بَادُون — singular بَادٍ. Root: ب-د-و. To come into view, to appear; and bādiya — the desert, the open country (the place where everything is visible because it is treeless). Badawī is from the same root.

ٱلْأَعْرَابthis word was treated in detail at al-Ḥujurāt, and the finding recorded there holds here too: aʿrāb does not mean "the Arabs"; it means the bedouin, that is, those who live a nomadic life. The same note was entered at al-Fatḥ as well. I rely on that treatment.

This is a critical note in view of the method (Method): the word names not an ethnic group but a way of living. And the verse does not condemn that way of living; it records the desire of the person who wants to flee there.

يَسْـَٔلُونَ عَنْ أَنۢبَآئِكُمْ — the completing of the picture

This is the finest point in the verse.

The position desired is not merely "to be far off". The verse adds a detail: to be far off and to ask for news.

نَبَأ — root ن-ب-أ. And it was treated as the name of a sūra at al-Nabaʾ. What was recorded there: a nabaʾ is not an ordinary piece of news; it is important news, news with consequences.

That is, the person described is following the event. He is not indifferent. Far off but curious; safe but informed.

This is a portrait worth recording, and it has a modern counterpart: standing outside the event and watching the event. The verse depicts this as a desire: to be safe and at the same time to be counted as inside what is happening.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the joining in one sentence of bādūna (far off) with yasʾalūna ʿan anbāʾikum (asking for news).

وَلَوْ كَانُوا۟ فِيكُم مَّا قَٰتَلُوٓا۟ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا — the final measurement

Again a law clause (a condition that did not come about) and again an illā qalīlā.

This expression occurs for the third time in this section of the sūra:

VerseThe constructionWhat is little
14mā talabbathū bihā illā yasīrāThe delay would have been little
16lā tumattaʿūna illā qalīlāThe enjoyment will be little
18lā yaʾtūna'l-baʾsa illā qalīlāTheir coming to the fighting is little
20mā qātalū illā qalīlāTheir fighting would have been little

Four notes of "little". And this repetition says something: the verses describe not an absence but an insufficiency. No one is entirely absent; everyone is present to some degree. And the sūra's measure is not presence or absence but quantity.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the fourfold repetition of the pattern.

And this prepares the twenty-first verse that comes immediately after: uswa ḥasana. Against what is insufficient, a measure is set.


33/21

لَّقَدْ كَانَ لَكُمْ فِى رَسُولِ ٱللَّهِ أُسْوَةٌ حَسَنَةٌ لِّمَن كَانَ يَرْجُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱلْيَوْمَ ٱلْءَاخِرَ وَذَكَرَ ٱللَّهَ كَثِيرًا

Laqad kāna lakum fī rasūli'llāhi uswatun ḥasanatun li-man kāna yarju'llāha wa'l-yawma'l-ākhira wa dhakara'llāha kathīrā

"There is indeed for you in the Messenger of God a good example — for whoever hopes for God and the Last Day and remembers God much."

The place of the verse

This verse stands in the middle of the siege section, and its place is no accident.

The twentieth verse had drawn a picture of insufficiency: coming little, fighting little, asking for news from afar. The twenty-first verse sets a measure in the very middle of that picture.

And the verse is not a command but a statement. It does not say "take him as an example"; it says "there is an example". The verb is kāna — the perfect, stating a settled condition.

This difference of word order must be recorded: an imperative sets up a demand, a declarative states a fact. The verse sets the exemplarity down not as a demand but as something that stands there. Whether it is used or not is left to the second half of the sentence.

أُسْوَة — root أ-س-و

This root was treated in detail at al-Mumtaḥana (60/4 and 60/6). I rely on that treatment and bring what was recorded there over to here, because it is needed for the understanding of this verse.

What was recorded there:

  • The concrete sense of the root is unexpected: to heal a wound, to treat it.
  • أَسَا الجُرْحَ — he treated the wound, he bound it up.
  • الآسِي — a physician, one who binds wounds.
  • الأُسْوَة / الإِسْوَة — that by looking at which consolation is found, whose state one aspires to.
  • المُوَاسَاة (muwāsāt) — to share someone's trouble, to give him a portion of what one has. From the same root.
  • The bond between the two branches of the root: in Arabic, the way to console someone is to show him another like himself. To say "you are not alone" is what binds the wound.

And now let us look at this root in the context of this verse.

The verse comes in the middle of a siege. Those addressed have been afraid, have been shaken, and some of them have wanted to flee. And precisely at that point a word whose root is "to bind a wound" is used.

This changes the emotional weight of the verse, and it is worth recording: the verse is not merely offering a model of behaviour. It is showing someone standing in the same place. The person inside the siege is looking at someone who stands inside the siege.

And the finding recorded at al-Mumtaḥana is completed here: there Abraham and those with him were set forth as an example, and there too something hard was being asked of those addressed (to put a distance between themselves and their own kin). In both places the word stands beside something hard.

The construct uswa ḥasana occurs in three places in the Qurʾān: this verse, and al-Mumtaḥina 60/4 and 60/6. All three are in a context of hardship.

حَسَنَة — root ح-س-ن. As was recorded at al-Mumtaḥana: the adjective is added because uswa is in itself neutral; the Qurʾān could have used the word uswa for a bad example too.

فِى رَسُولِ ٱللَّهِ — "in"

The preposition — "in". The verse does not say "the Messenger of God is an example to you"; it says "in the Messenger of God there is an example".

This is a distinction at the level of word order and it carries meaning: the example is not identical with the person; it is something found in the person. That is, what is to be looked at is not the whole of the person but that thing in him.

I give this note with caution: the particle is used in Arabic in functions other than the adverbial, and I draw no forced conclusion from this. What I record is the picture the wording gives.

لِّمَن كَانَ يَرْجُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱلْيَوْمَ ٱلْءَاخِرَ — the condition

This is the most often skipped and the most important place in the verse.

The first half of the sentence made a statement: there is an example. The second half makes the working of that exemplarity conditional.

The particle لِ here conveys restriction: "for…". The example stands there for everyone, but its working depends on a condition.

And the condition consists of three elements:

ElementRootWhat
يَرْجُوا۟ ٱللَّهَر-ج-وTo hope for God
وَٱلْيَوْمَ ٱلْءَاخِرَTo hope for the Last Day
وَذَكَرَ ٱللَّهَ كَثِيرًاذ-ك-رTo remember God much

رَجَا — root ر-ج-و. To hope, to expect. And the root has an interesting side: arjā from the same root means "to postpone"; rajā also means "the edge, the brink of a thing" (arjāʾihā — the edges of the sky, at al-Ḥāqqa 69/17). In the root of the word, hope is to stand at an edge — on the border of a place not yet reached.

It is worth pausing on why this condition is set.

An example is an example only for someone who looks in the same direction as it. To look at a person's conduct and draw a measure from it requires sharing why that conduct was performed. If it is not shared, the conduct is unintelligible and cannot be repeated.

In the siege context of the verse this condition is particularly meaningful: the people in the thirteenth and nineteenth verses were in the same scene. They too saw the same example. But it did not work — because the condition was absent.

That is, the verse explains why an exemplarity works in some and not in others. The example is not deficient; a condition is deficient in the eye that looks.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the conditional structure of the verse and the fact that this verse comes immediately after the verses describing those who saw the example and did not do the same.

وَذَكَرَ ٱللَّهَ كَثِيرًا — the third condition

And the third condition is on a different level from the first two. The first two are an orientation (hoping), the third a practice (remembering).

The tense of the verb changes too: yarjū (imperfect, continuity) → dhakara (perfect). The lexicographers record this shift; the perfect here conveys a state that has come about and settled.

كَثِيرًا — "much". The measure is quantitative. And this will link directly with the forty-first verse of the sūra: "O you who believe! Remember God much"ٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ ذِكْرًا كَثِيرًا (33/41).

That is, what the sūra sets down as a condition in the twenty-first verse it repeats as a command in the forty-first. There are twenty verses between the two, and the sūra's heaviest regulations lie in between.

I record this link as my own reading; its ground is the pairing of dhikr + kathīr in the two verses.

What the verse does not say

A note is needed, because this verse has been much debated.

The verse does not state the extent of the exemplarity. Which behaviours are exemplary and which are particular to a situation is not in the wording of this verse.

This question has been debated at length in the history of Islamic thought — the bindingness of the Sunna, its extent, its kinds, the distinction between what is religious and what is human. This commentary does not enter that debate and issues no ruling.

What emerges from the wording of the verse is this: there is an example, it is good, and its working depends on a condition of orientation. Its detail is not here.

What this says to the present

One. Being an example is different from giving a rule.

A rule says what is to be done. An example shows how someone did it. And the difference between the two is this: a rule must foresee situations; an example gives a direction even in situations that were not foreseen.

That the verse comes in the middle of a siege supports this: a siege is a situation that was not foreseen, and a list of rules does not suffice there.

Two. The measure of the root: being an example is a form of consolation.

In the root of the word uswa there is the binding of a wound. This is an unexpected answer to the question of what exemplarity is for: an example says, besides "do it this way", also "this is a thing that can be done".

If something hard is being asked, the greatest obstacle is most often that the thing looks impossible. An example removes the claim of impossibility.

Three. The present-day face of the condition.

The verse says that the example will not work in everyone. And this shows the limit of exemplarity: showing a person's conduct produces no change if there is no orientation in the person opposite.

Its practical counterpart is plain: you cannot change anyone merely by showing an example. An example guides the person who is already looking in a direction; in the person who is not looking it produces no effect. The verse records this not as a fault but as a way things work.


33/22

وَلَمَّا رَءَا ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ ٱلْأَحْزَابَ قَالُوا۟ هَٰذَا مَا وَعَدَنَا ٱللَّهُ وَرَسُولُهُۥ وَصَدَقَ ٱللَّهُ وَرَسُولُهُۥ وَمَا زَادَهُمْ إِلَّآ إِيمَٰنًا وَتَسْلِيمًا

Wa lammā raʾa'l-muʾminūna'l-aḥzāba qālū hādhā mā waʿadana'llāhu wa rasūluhu wa ṣadaqa'llāhu wa rasūluh, wa mā zādahum illā īmānan wa taslīmā

"And when the believers saw the confederated groups they said, 'This is what God and His Messenger promised us; God and His Messenger spoke truly.' And it increased them only in faith and in submission."

The answer to the twelfth verse

This verse is the direct counterpart of the twelfth verse, and the correspondence is established at the level of the words. The table was given at the twelfth verse; here I complete it.

33/1233/22
The verbyaqūlu — they were sayingqālū — they said
What was seenThe same sceneraʾa'l-muʾminūna'l-aḥzāb
The key wordwaʿadanāwaʿadanā
The verdictillā ghurūrā — nothing but delusionṣadaqa'llāhu wa rasūluh — they spoke truly
The outcomemā zādahum illā īmānan wa taslīmā

The two verses use the same verb (waʿada) and the same two subjects (God and His Messenger). The only thing that differs is the continuation of the sentence.

And this is the strongest datum of the text that the sūra establishes in this section: the difference lies not in the event but in the reading of the event. This is what I recorded as my own reading, and it is completed here.

وَلَمَّا رَءَا — "when they saw"

لَمَّا — a particle of time; generally in the sense "at the moment when something happened", binding two events together.

And the verb is raʾā — they saw. In this section of the sūra the matter of seeing occurs for the third time:

VerseThe seeing
9junūdan lam tarawhā — armies you did not see
10zāghati'l-abṣār — the eyes swerved
22lammā raʾā al-muʾminūna'l-aḥzāb — when the believers saw

Three verses, three different states of seeing: help that cannot be seen, a gaze that loses its focus, and a steady gaze. In the twenty-second verse the eye does not swerve; it sees what it sees and frames a sentence.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the distribution of the roots ر-أ-ي and ب-ص-ر within the section.

هَٰذَا مَا وَعَدَنَا ٱللَّهُ — the demonstrative pronoun

هَٰذَا — the near demonstrative: "this here". It points to something that could be indicated by hand.

And what is being pointed to is the siege itself. The believers point not to a deliverance but to a danger and say "this is what was promised".

This is the most striking place in the verse and must be read carefully. It can be understood in two ways:

ReadingWhat it saysIts ground
The hardship itself had been promisedIt had been announced beforehand that difficulty would come; when it came, that was confirmedThe logic of al-Baqara 2/214: "without what came upon those before you coming upon you…"
What would come after the hardship had been promisedThis hardship is the sign of the promised outcomeThe outcome in verse 25

The two readings do not exclude one another and the wording of the verse is open to both. I do not impose a preference.

But I record a datum of the text in favour of the first reading: hādhā is the near demonstrative and points to what is present at that moment. What is present at that moment is the siege.

وَصَدَقَ ٱللَّهُ وَرَسُولُهُۥ — the confirming of the word

The root ص-د-ق was treated at the seventh verse: truthfulness; and the concrete side of the root, firmness.

And here the root sets up the language of a covenant. The eighth verse had said "so that the truthful may be asked about their truthfulness". In the twenty-second verse the believers use the same root of the other party: ṣadaqa'llāhu wa rasūluh.

That is, within the sūra ṣidq is established as a concept working in both directions: the one who gives the word keeps it, and so does the one who receives it. I record this as my own reading.

وَمَا زَادَهُمْ إِلَّآ إِيمَٰنًا وَتَسْلِيمًا — the increase of faith

This sentence was taken into the list of evidence at al-Fatḥ in the debate over whether faith increases. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat the debate here.

What was recorded there: whether faith increases is one of the oldest debates in the history of theology; the two views and their grounds were given in a table, no side was taken, and it was recorded that the question arises from a difference of definition.

There this further finding was made about this verse, and I bring it over here: "Some of the things that set off the increase are good news and some are bad news. At al-Aḥzāb 33/22 what causes the increase is a threat outright."

A linguistic note on the subjects of the sentence: mā zādahum — the agent of the verb is not named; on the plainest reading the agent is what was seen in the preceding sentence (al-aḥzāb, or the scene generally). That is, what produces the increase is the threat itself.

تَسْلِيم — root س-ل-م. To be sound, to be without flaw; and from this salām, islām, taslīm. The concrete sense of the root is a wholeness — a thing's being complete, without a crack.

And that the word is set beside faith in this verse is worth noting. The two words say two different things:

WordWhat
إِيمَانAssent — accepting that a thing is true
تَسْلِيمSubmission — leaving oneself to that acceptance

One is in the mind, the other in conduct. And the verse says that both increase together.

And the "wholeness" sense in the root of taslīm closes a ring with the fourth verse: the fourth verse had said that there are not two hearts in one body — that is, indivisibility. Submission is the enacted form of that indivisibility.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the reciprocal position within the sūra of the two roots (the refusal of duality in ق-ل-ب and the wholeness of س-ل-م).


33/23

مِّنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ رِجَالٌ صَدَقُوا۟ مَا عَٰهَدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ عَلَيْهِ فَمِنْهُم مَّن قَضَىٰ نَحْبَهُۥ وَمِنْهُم مَّن يَنتَظِرُ وَمَا بَدَّلُوا۟ تَبْدِيلًا

Mina'l-muʾminīna rijālun ṣadaqū mā ʿāhadu'llāha ʿalayh, fa-minhum man qaḍā naḥbahu wa minhum man yantaẓir, wa mā baddalū tabdīlā

"Among the believers are men who were true to the pledge they gave God. Some of them have fulfilled their vow (have given their lives), and some are waiting. They have made no change at all."

One of the most frequently cited verses of the sūra

The word order of the verse is striking from its first word. The sentence begins by bringing the predicate forward: mina'l-muʾminīna rijālun — "among the believers are men". In Arabic this is a structure required when the subject is indefinite, and it produces emphasis.

مِّنَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ — the partitive (indicating a part). The particle min here means "some of". That is, the verse is not speaking about all the believers; it is setting a part apart.

This must also be recorded in view of the method (Method): the verse does not load an attribute wholesale onto a group. Neither in praise nor in blame.

رِجَال — the weight of the word

Root: ر-ج-ل. And the concrete sense of the root is the foot: rijl — a foot. Rājil — one who goes on foot. Rajul — a grown man.

The word's use here is assessed in two ways in classical exegesis:

ExplanationWhat it says
It conveys sexThe context is war; the word is in its proper sense
It conveys a qualityRajul is also used in Arabic as a word of praise: "a man in the full sense"

The second explanation is supported by the Qurʾān's use of the word elsewhere: "And a man came running from the far end of the city" (Yā Sīn 36/20); "And a believing man from Pharaoh's household, who concealed his faith, said…" (Ghāfir 40/28) — this use was treated at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin). In both places the word emphasises someone standing alone.

I do not impose a preference. But this can be recorded: the two explanations do not conflict; the word can carry both a sex and a quality, and this is common in Arabic.

And there is a link with the fourth verse: there too li-rajulin occurred — "He has not made two hearts for a man". The sūra uses the word twice: once as the subject of indivisibility, once as the subject of keeping one's word. The two uses look to the same place: the one who is not divided, who stands by the word he gave.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that both occurrences of the word in the sūra are in a context of "wholeness".

صَدَقُوا۟ مَا عَٰهَدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ عَلَيْهِ — the counterpart of the fifteenth verse

This sentence is the direct answer to the fifteenth verse.

33/1533/23
WhoThose who wanted to fleeRijālun
The verbkānū ʿāhadu'llāha — they had given a pledgeṣadaqū mā ʿāhadu'llāha ʿalayh — they were true to the pledge
The outcomeyuwallūna'l-adbār (the opposite of the pledge given)mā baddalū tabdīlā — they made no change

The same root (ع-ه-د), two different outcomes. The pledge had been given on both sides; the difference lies in what was done with the pledge.

And that the verb ṣadaqū is constructed with an object is striking: not "they were truthful in their pledge" but a structure closer to "they made the pledge they had given come true". In Arabic the verb ṣadaqa can take a direct object. That is, truthfulness is depicted as a work done upon the word given.

قَضَىٰ نَحْبَهُۥ — "he fulfilled his vow"

This is the expression most often dwelt on in the verse.

نَحْب — root ن-ح-ب. The senses the lexicographers record:

SenseExplanation
A vow, a pledgeAn obligation a person takes upon himself
An appointed term, the end of a lifeA determined span
Weeping aloudNaḥīb — sobbing
Walking fast and resolutelyNaḥb fi'l-sayr — speed on the road

قَضَىٰ — root ق-ض-ي. To complete a matter, to finish it, to settle it by a decision.

The construction occurs only here in the Qurʾān, and in classical exegesis these two explanations come to the fore:

ExplanationWhat it saysIts ground
He gave his life (he died)Naḥb here means "the appointed term" or "the pledge of death he took upon himself"The contrast in the following clause: wa minhum man yantaẓir — "and some are waiting"
He fulfilled his vowNaḥb is "a vow"; the person completed what he had undertakenThe first sense of the root

The two explanations do not exclude one another and in classical exegesis they are mostly understood together: what was undertaken was completed — and in the context of this sūra the completion came by the giving of a life.

I do not impose a preference. But the datum the word order gives is this: the sentence sets up a contrastqaḍā / yantaẓir. And since intiẓār (waiting) is a continuing state, the qaḍā set against it conveys something finished.

And the wording of the verse gives no names. Certain names are mentioned in connection with this verse in the classical sources. No name is given in this commentary, because the reports differ at the level of detail, and the verse itself is making a description, not an identification.

وَمِنْهُم مَّن يَنتَظِرُ — those who wait

ٱنْتَظَرَ — root ن-ظ-ر. To look; and intiẓār — to look while waiting for a thing to come.

That the verb comes in the imperfect is worth noting: the first part is perfect (qaḍā), the second imperfect (yantaẓir). One is closed, the other open.

And the clause has no object. The verse gives no answer to the question "waiting for what?" In classical exegesis it is said that this is waiting for what the first group reached (that is, the completion of the word given).

This aspect of the verse says something worth recording, and I give it as my own reading: the verse divides those who kept their word into two groups and names both in the same sentence, with the same praise. That is, keeping one's word does not require the word to have been completed. The one who has not yet completed it is inside the same description.

This shows where the measure is set: the measure lies not in the outcome but in not changing.

وَمَا بَدَّلُوا۟ تَبْدِيلًا — the closing

بَدَّلَ — root ب-د-ل. To put another thing in the place of a thing. Badal, tabdīl, istibdāl are from the same root.

And again a cognate accusative: mā baddalū tabdīlā. Like zulzilū zilzālan shadīdā in the eleventh verse, the verb is reinforced by its verbal noun.

The reciprocal position of the two reinforcements within the sūra is worth recording:

VerseStructureWhat is reinforced
11zulzilū zilzālan shadīdāThe violence of the shaking
23mā baddalū tabdīlāThe absoluteness of not changing

The same grammatical instrument, once in an affirmative and once in a negative sentence, twelve verses apart. The sūra says first how violent the shaking was, then how absolutely those who did not change failed to change in spite of it.

And when the two verses are read together, the measure of the sūra is completed: to be shaken is not a fault (11); to change is a fault (23). The same people were both shaken and did not change.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the use of the same grammatical structure in the two verses.

And the word tabdīl will occur once more in this sūra: in the sixty-second verse, of sunnat Allāh: "You will find no change (tabdīl) in the way of God." The same word, once for people and once for a way of working.

What this says to the present

The measure of the verse turns an outcome-focused view upside down.

Two measures can be used in assessing an undertaking: was it completed, and was it changed. The verse chooses the second.

Its practical consequence is this: not having finished yet is not a deficiency. The deficiency is giving up on the road. The verse says this by naming the one who completed and the one who waits in the same sentence.

And the choice of the expression mā baddalū matters too: the verse does not say "they did not give up" or "they did not flee". It says "they did not change". That is, the measure is fidelity to the text of the word given. The word remained what it was.

This is the exact opposite of the excuse in the thirteenth verse: there the word stood in place but its content had been altered (on the ground that the circumstances had changed). Here, with the circumstances at their heaviest, the word stayed the same.


33/24

لِّيَجْزِىَ ٱللَّهُ ٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ بِصِدْقِهِمْ وَيُعَذِّبَ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ إِن شَآءَ أَوْ يَتُوبَ عَلَيْهِمْ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا

Li-yajziya'llāhu'l-ṣādiqīna bi-ṣidqihim wa yuʿadhdhiba'l-munāfiqīna in shāʾa aw yatūba ʿalayhim, inna'llāha kāna ghafūran raḥīmā

"So that God may reward the truthful for their truthfulness, and punish the hypocrites if He wills, or turn to them in forgiveness. God is Forgiving, Merciful."

A close with two poles — and an asymmetry

The verse is the sentence that gives the ground of the siege section: it begins with li- (the lām of causation), that is, "so that…".

And the most striking side of the verse is an asymmetry.

SideOutcomeThe note
The truthfulyajziya… bi-ṣidqihimA single option; tied to a cause
The hypocritesyuʿadhdhiba or yatūba ʿalayhimTwo options; with the note in shāʾa

On one side one road, on the other side two. And the side with two roads is the side that has been censured.

This is a fact of word order that must be recorded. For twenty verses the sūra criticised a group in detail. And in closing the section it leaves that group a door.

The same structure was recorded at al-Fatḥ: "What is at issue is not a door closed but a participation deferred." In al-Aḥzāb the door is opened wider still, because the possibility of tawba is written explicitly.

And, per the method (Method), this must be stressed: the sūra frames no permanent ruling about a group. In the nineteenth verse it was said lam yuʾminū; in the twenty-fourth a door of repentance is opened to the same group. What is understood when the two verses are read together is this: the ruling concerns the state at that moment; it is not a file closed on a person.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the two verses concern the same group and that the second opens a door.

بِصِدْقِهِمْ — the bāʾ of cause

The preposition bāʾ here conveys causation: "for their truthfulness".

And the root ص-د-ق occurs in this sūra for the fourth time, and twice in this verse:

VerseWordWho
8al-ṣādiqīna ʿan ṣidqihimThe prophets (to be asked)
22ṣadaqa'llāhu wa rasūluhGod and His Messenger
23ṣadaqū mā ʿāhadu'llāha ʿalayhThe men who kept their word
24al-ṣādiqīna bi-ṣidqihimThe same men (the recompense)

The root forms a spine in this section of the sūra, and the question of the eighth verse finds its answer here: the truthful were to be asked about their truthfulness (8); the truthful will be recompensed for their truthfulness (24).

And the verbal resemblance between the two verses is almost exact: al-ṣādiqīna ʿan ṣidqihim / al-ṣādiqīna bi-ṣidqihim. The only thing that changes is the preposition: one indicates the subject of the question, the other the cause of the recompense.

I record this link as my own reading; its ground is the repetition of the two constructions with a single letter's difference.

إِن شَآءَ — where the note belongs

To which part of the sentence does the note in shāʾa (if He wills) attach? In classical exegesis there are two readings:

ReadingWhat it says
Attached to the punishment alone"If He wills He punishes, or He turns to them in forgiveness" — the note of willing stands before the punishment
Attached to both verbsBoth the punishment and the acceptance of repentance depend on the willing

I do not impose a preference. But the word order, in that the note comes immediately after the verb yuʿadhdhiba, seems to support the first reading a little more. This is an observation, not a ruling.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا — the verse-ending

The siege section closes with two names of mercy. For nineteen verses fear, betrayal, excuses and sharp tongues have been described; and the section ends with forgiveness.

This is a repetition of a pattern recorded at al-Fatḥ: the Qurʾān often closes its hard sections with a statement of forgiveness. Sūrat al-Fatḥ ended both its verse 14 and its verse 29 with forgiveness.


33/25

وَرَدَّ ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ بِغَيْظِهِمْ لَمْ يَنَالُوا۟ خَيْرًا وَكَفَى ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ٱلْقِتَالَ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ قَوِيًّا عَزِيزًا

Wa radda'llāhu'lladhīna kafarū bi-ghayẓihim lam yanālū khayrā, wa kafa'llāhu'l-muʾminīna'l-qitāl, wa kāna'llāhu qawiyyan ʿazīzā

"And God turned back those who disbelieved with their rage; they gained no good. And God sufficed the believers in the fighting. God is Strong, Mighty."

The outcome of the siege

It is told in a single verse. Twenty verses were given to the inner world; the outcome fitted into one verse.

And this shows what the section is about: the text's interest lay not in the event itself but in the person inside the event.

رَدَّ — root ر-د-د

To turn back, to return, to send back. Radd, irtidād, mardūd are from the same root.

And the choice of the verb is worth recording. The verse does not say "He defeated", "He scattered", "He destroyed". It says "He turned them back".

The verb describes a movement: those who came went back. And this agrees with the logic of the sūra's name: al-aḥzāb — companies that had come together. What came together dispersed; they returned to where they had come from.

That is, the verse depicts the event not as a defeat but as a cancellation. The siege did not take place; the undertaking was withdrawn.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the choice of the verb.

بِغَيْظِهِمْ — "with their rage"

غَيْظ — root غ-ي-ظ. Rage swallowed down, boiling within. What the lexicographers record about its difference from ghaḍab: ghaḍab is anger that shows itself outwardly, ghayẓ is anger that boils within.

The preposition bāʾ here conveys accompaniment (muṣāḥaba): "together with their rage" — that is, they carried their rage away with them.

This expression should be compared with ḥamiyya (heat of anger) at al-Fatḥ 48/26, and the finding established there goes one step further here.

al-Fatḥ 48/26al-Aḥzāb 33/25
The wordḥamiyya — root ح-م-ي (heating)ghayẓ — root غ-ي-ظ (boiling within)
In whomIn the hearts of those who disbelievedIn those who disbelieved
What happenedSakīna was set against itThey were turned back together with it
The outcomeHands were withheld without a clashNo good at all was gained

Both sūras record the same thing: heat of anger produces no result.

And the detail al-Aḥzāb adds is this, and I record it: the rage is named not at the beginning of the event but at its end. That is, the verse does not say that those who came came in rage; it says that they went back in rage. Rage is not the cause of the undertaking but its residue.

And the finding at al-Fatḥ is worth repeating: "What the verse does is not to criticise the heat of anger in a moral idiom; it is to name it as a state." So too here: the verse does not condemn the rage, it records it as the only thing left in hand.

لَمْ يَنَالُوا۟ خَيْرًا — "they gained no good"

نَالَ — root ن-و-ل. To stretch out one's hand to a thing and take it, to reach, to obtain.

And the choice of the word khayr must be dwelt on. The verse does not say "they gained no victory" or "they did not reach their aim". It says "they gained no good".

The word speaks with the besiegers' own measure. What they were seeking was, by their own lights, a "good" — a gain, an outcome. The verse takes that measure and reduces the result to zero.

This is a rhetorical choice worth recording: the verse does not pass judgement on the other side's aim; it says that they did not reach their aim. I record this as my own reading.

وَكَفَى ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ ٱلْقِتَالَ — "He sufficed the believers in the fighting"

كَفَى — root ك-ف-ي. To suffice, to be enough. This root occurred in the third verse too: wa kafā bi'llāhi wakīlā.

The sentence has two objects: kafa'llāhu al-muʾminīna al-qitāl — "God sufficed the believers in the fighting / lifted the burden of the fighting from them".

Two senses are recorded in classical exegesis:

ReadingWhat it says
He lifted the fighting from themThe matter was resolved without a great clash
He sufficed them in the fightingGod's help was enough against those facing them

Both are possible in the language and they do not exclude one another. I do not impose a preference.

And I record a link: in the third verse it was said kafā bi'llāhi wakīlā — "God suffices as a trustee". In the twenty-fifth verse the same root is repeated inside the event: kafa'llāh. The declaration given at the head of the sūra is named in its middle as having come about.

I record this link as my own reading; its ground is the position of the root in the two verses.

قَوِيًّا عَزِيزًا — the verse-ending

قَوِىّ — root ق-و-ي. Strength. عَزِيز — root ع-ز-ز. And the concrete sense of the root is hardness, resistance to wear: arḍun ʿazāz — hard, impassable ground. From this "mighty, unconquerable, precious".

The coming of the two names together: one conveys strength, the other the unwearing quality of that strength. And this agrees with the content of the verse: the besiegers gathered a force and that force dispersed; the verse-ending names a strength that does not disperse.


33/26-27

وَأَنزَلَ ٱلَّذِينَ ظَٰهَرُوهُم مِّنْ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ مِن صَيَاصِيهِمْ وَقَذَفَ فِى قُلُوبِهِمُ ٱلرُّعْبَ فَرِيقًا تَقْتُلُونَ وَتَأْسِرُونَ فَرِيقًا · وَأَوْرَثَكُمْ أَرْضَهُمْ وَدِيَٰرَهُمْ وَأَمْوَٰلَهُمْ وَأَرْضًا لَّمْ تَطَـُٔوهَا وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ قَدِيرًا

Wa anzala'lladhīna ẓāharūhum min ahli'l-kitābi min ṣayāṣīhim wa qadhafa fī qulūbihimu'l-ruʿba, farīqan taqtulūna wa taʾsirūna farīqā · Wa awrathakum arḍahum wa diyārahum wa amwālahum wa arḍan lam taṭaʾūhā, wa kāna'llāhu ʿalā kulli shayʾin qadīrā

"And He brought down from their strongholds those of the People of the Book who had supported them, and cast terror into their hearts. Some you were killing, and some you were taking captive. · And He gave you their land, their dwellings and their possessions as an inheritance, and a land you had not set foot on. God has power over all things."

First a note, per the method (Method)

These two verses are the place in this sūra that must be read with the greatest care, and before beginning to read, four notes must be entered explicitly.

One. The verse recounts a single event. The verbs are perfect (anzala, qadhafa, awratha) and they take as their subject a particular group (alladhīna ẓāharūhum — "those who supported them"). This is not a statement of a rule but the record of an event.

Two. The verse frames no general ruling about a religion or a lineage. The expression ahl al-kitāb here is not a designation but an identification: it states who those who gave support were. Indeed the subject of the sentence is not ahl al-kitāb but alladhīna ẓāharūhum — "those who supported them". That is, the ruling is tied not to an identity but to an act.

Three. The Qurʾān uses the same expression (ahl al-kitāb) elsewhere in entirely different contexts — a call to common ground (Āl ʿImrān 3/64), the note that among them is an upright community (Āl ʿImrān 3/113), the permitting of their food and of marriage (al-Māʾida 5/5). To draw a general ruling from a single verse runs counter to the Qurʾān's own usage.

Four. Al-Mumtaḥina 60/8, as a boundary verse, holds here too, and it was cited with the same function at al-Fatḥ: "God does not forbid you to deal kindly and justly with those who have not fought you over religion and have not driven you from your homes."

The note in Method works here exactly: "no wholesale ruling is issued about an ethnic or religious group; what the verse describes are attributes." This commentary abides by that note.

Historical background — in the language of "it is transmitted"

In the classical works of biography and exegesis it is transmitted that during the siege a community bound by treaty within the city broke the treaty and gave support to the besiegers; that after the siege dispersed this community was besieged in turn; that after their surrender a ruling was applied through arbitration, within the law of war of that day.

The details of this account — the name of the community, the identity of the arbiter, the extent of the ruling applied, the numbers — vary in the sources and are not given in this commentary. The reason is the rule of Method about fabrication and certainty: when the reports differ at the level of detail, the detail cannot be presented as certain knowledge.

And there is a more important reason, which I record: the wording of the verse gives none of these details. The Qurʾān has not written the name of a community. This is not a deficiency but a choice consistent with the principle recorded at al-Munāfiqūn: the description lasts, the exposure passes.

ظَٰهَرُوهُم — "they gave support"

Root: ظ-ه-ر (the back). And this is the same root as tuẓāhirūna (ẓihār) in the fourth verse.

This is a word-web within the sūra that must be recorded.

VersePatternMeaning
4tuẓāhirūna minhunnaẒihār — "you are to me as my mother's back"
26ẓāharūhumTo back someone, to support

The same root, the same form (Form III, mufāʿala), two entirely different senses. And what joins the two is the back: in one the back is the subject of a comparison, in the other of a support.

Ẓahīr in Arabic means "a backer, a supporter" — one who stands behind another. The picture in the word is concrete: giving one's back and lending support.

I record this link as my own reading; its ground is that the two words are from the same root and in the same form.

صَيَاصِي — strongholds

Singular صِيصَة. Root: ص-ي-ص. The primary sense the lexicographers record is interesting: صِيصَة, the spur on a cock's leg, and the horn of an ox — that is, the pointed limb with which an animal defends itself. Also the pointed instrument the weaver uses.

From this comes the sense "fortress, refuge": the structure with which a community defends itself.

The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

And the choice of the word is worth recording: the verse does not use the common words ḥuṣūn (fortresses) or qilāʿ. It chooses a word whose root is a defensive organ. That is, the place they were brought down from is not merely a building; it is a community's instrument of defence.

مِن صَيَاصِيهِمْ — the particle min indicates the place of departure: down from there.

أَنزَلَ — root ن-ز-ل. To bring down. And the choice of the verb is concrete too: a movement from above downwards. In the tenth verse those who came, came min fawqikum (from above you); here those who gave support are brought down.

وَقَذَفَ فِى قُلُوبِهِمُ ٱلرُّعْبَ

قَذَفَ — root ق-ذ-ف. To throw, to hurl. The word is used in the Qurʾān for slander too (qadhf).

And the concreteness of the verb is striking: fear is not "given", it is thrown. Like the hurling of an object.

رُعْب — root ر-ع-ب. Fear, terror; and the concrete side the lexicographers record: raʾaba'l-ḥawḍ — he filled the basin. That is, ruʿb is fear that fills — that leaves no room inside.

The construction occurs in several places in the Qurʾān (Āl ʿImrān 3/151; al-Anfāl 8/12; al-Ḥashr 59/2treated at al-Ḥashr). The occurrence in al-Ḥashr is especially close, and there too an evacuation is recounted.

And the word heart once more in the sūra: the impossibility of two hearts in the fourth verse, hearts reaching the throats in the tenth, diseased hearts in the twelfth, hearts filled with fear here. All the sūra's distinctions are made at the level of the heart.

فَرِيقًا تَقْتُلُونَ وَتَأْسِرُونَ فَرِيقًا — word order

The word order of this sentence must be dwelt on, because there is a deliberate symmetry.

ClauseFirst elementSecond element
فَرِيقًا تَقْتُلُونَfarīqanobjecttaqtulūnaverb
وَتَأْسِرُونَ فَرِيقًاtaʾsirūnaverbfarīqāobject

In Arabic this kind of symmetry is called laff wa nashr, or more aptly tarṣīʿ / muqābala: in the first clause the object comes first, in the second it comes last. A mirror structure.

And the word farīq occurs for the second time in this sūra — its first occurrence was in the thirteenth verse: yastaʾdhinu farīqun minhum ("a company asks leave"). The same word, once for a company that wants to flee, once for a community split into two companies. The root already conveyed "separating".

That the verbs come in the imperfect is also worth noting: taqtulūna, taʾsirūna. While all the verbs around them are perfect (anzala, qadhafa, awratha), these two are imperfect. The lexicographers explain this as ḥikāyat al-ḥāl (the vivid setting of a past event before the eyes).

وَأَوْرَثَكُمْ — inheritance

Root: و-ر-ث. Inheritance. And the choice of the verb is worth recording: the verse does not say "He gave" or "it became spoils for you". It says "He gave it to you as an inheritance".

وَأَرْضًا لَّمْ تَطَـُٔوهَا — "a land you had not set foot on"

وَطِئَ — root و-ط-أ. To tread with the foot, to trample. This root was treated at al-Fatḥ 48/25 (an taṭaʾūhum — "that you should trample them").

And the contrast between the two verses is worth recording:

PlaceThe constructionWhat
al-Fatḥ 48/25an taṭaʾūhum bi-ghayri ʿilmTrampling unknowingly — a ground for halting an action
al-Aḥzāb 33/27arḍan lam taṭaʾūhāA land not set foot on — a promise

The same verb, once a possibility to be avoided, once a future possibility.

What "the land you had not set foot on" is has been debated in classical exegesis:

ViewWhat it says
Lands not yet reachedPlaces to be opened later are meant; a future promise given in the perfect
Places not actually entered at the timeWithin the same event, areas taken over without a clash

I do not impose a preference. The wording of the verse gives no place-name.

And one further note: by saying lam taṭaʾūhā the verse uses a negative qualification. That is, the land is described not by being possessed but by not yet having been trodden. This agrees with the pattern of "the distance between a promise and its coming about" recorded at al-Fatḥ.

وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ قَدِيرًا — the close of the section

The siege section ends here. Nineteen verses.

And the verse-ending that closes the section is worth comparing with the one that opened it:

VerseVerse-endingWhat
9 (opening)bimā taʿmalūna baṣīrāSeeing
27 (closing)ʿalā kulli shayʾin qadīrāPowerful

The section opens with seeing and closes with power. And what happens in between is exactly this: a help that was not seen (9), a party that sees, and in the end a force turned back.

I record this as my own reading.

What this says to the present

This is the place where the greatest care must be taken in speaking of what these verses say to the present, and, per the method (Method), I draw the limit explicitly.

These verses cannot be used to fix an attitude today towards any community, religion or people. The reasons are inside the text:

One. The subject of the verse is not an identity but an act: ẓāharūhum — they gave support. Without the act there is no ruling.

Two. The verse recounts a single, historical event and its verbs are perfect. It is not a sentence of rule.

Three. The same Qurʾān uses the same expression (ahl al-kitāb) in contexts of common ground, of kindness and of justice as well. To take one place in a text and disregard its other places is not to read that text.

And current politics is not entered. The note in Method is plain and is abided by in this commentary.

A measure that can be drawn from the text and targets no one is this: the verse concerns the breaking of a treaty. And it agrees with the whole logic of the sūra: the seventh verse spoke of the weight of a word, the fifteenth of the word given being asked about, the twenty-third of not changing the word. The twenty-sixth verse records a case in which the word was broken.

From beginning to end the sūra is about the word: the word that stays in the mouth (4), the word given and kept (23), the word given and broken (26). I record this as my own reading.


33/28-29

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّبِىُّ قُل لِّأَزْوَٰجِكَ إِن كُنتُنَّ تُرِدْنَ ٱلْحَيَوٰةَ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَزِينَتَهَا فَتَعَالَيْنَ أُمَتِّعْكُنَّ وَأُسَرِّحْكُنَّ سَرَاحًا جَمِيلًا · وَإِن كُنتُنَّ تُرِدْنَ ٱللَّهَ وَرَسُولَهُۥ وَٱلدَّارَ ٱلْءَاخِرَةَ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ أَعَدَّ لِلْمُحْسِنَٰتِ مِنكُنَّ أَجْرًا عَظِيمًا

Yā ayyuha'l-nabiyyu qul li-azwājika in kuntunna turidna'l-ḥayāta'l-dunyā wa zīnatahā fa-taʿālayna umattiʿkunna wa usarriḥkunna sarāḥan jamīlā · Wa in kuntunna turidna'llāha wa rasūlahu wa'l-dāra'l-ākhirata fa-inna'llāha aʿadda li'l-muḥsināti minkunna ajran ʿaẓīmā

"O Prophet! Say to your wives: If you desire the life of this world and its adornment, then come, I will give you a provision and release you in a fair release. · But if you desire God, His Messenger and the abode of the hereafter, then know that God has prepared a great reward for those among you who do good."

The opening of a new block

The siege is over; the sūra enters the house. And the entry is made with the sūra's second address yā ayyuha'l-nabiyy.

And the first thing the block does is to offer a choice. This is worth recording: in entering the house the sūra begins not with a command but with a question.

قُل لِّأَزْوَٰجِكَ — address through an intermediary

The verse addresses the Prophet and asks him to say it to his wives. That is, the address has two layers.

And this layering will disappear in the verses that follow: in the thirtieth and thirty-first the speech continues in the third person, and from the thirty-second onwards directly in the second person feminine plural (kunna, not kum). That is, the sūra begins with an intermediary and passes to direct address.

I record this as a datum of the text.

Two conditions, two answers

The structure of the verses is an exact symmetry:

The first condition (28)The second condition (29)
The particlein kuntunna turidnawa in kuntunna turidna
The objectal-ḥayāta'l-dunyā wa zīnatahāAllāha wa rasūlahu wa'l-dāra'l-ākhira
How many elementsTwo (life + adornment)Three (God + Messenger + hereafter)
The answerAn offer: taʿālaynaA statement: inna'llāha aʿadda
The outcomesarāḥan jamīlāajran ʿaẓīmā

There are two points of word order.

One. The answer to the first condition is a command, the answer to the second a statement. In the first it is said "come, let me do such-and-such" — a procedure is described. In the second there is no procedure; what has been prepared is simply announced.

And this difference is meaningful: the first road requires a decision and that decision has a procedure. The second road is not a decision but a continuation. There is nothing new to be done.

Two. The second condition has three elements, the first two. And the third element (al-dāru'l-ākhira — the abode of the hereafter) is the counterpart of al-dunyā in the first condition. That is, the list has been deliberately kept longer: on the other side there are both counterparts and more.

I record these two points as my own reading.

ٱلْحَيَوٰةَ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَزِينَتَهَا

دُنْيَا — root د-ن-و. To be near. Dunyā is the feminine of the elative: "the nearest". It was treated at al-Layl and elsewhere.

The word itself carries no verdict: dunyā does not mean "bad"; it means "near". And ākhira, opposite it, means "later". Both are words of time.

زِينَة — root ز-ي-ن. Adornment. And this semantic field will meet us once more in the thirty-third verse, in tabarruj — a different root, but the same field.

And the addition of the word zīna is worth noting: the verse is not content with "the life of this world", it adds "and its adornment". That is, what is meant is not staying alive; it is the surplus of life.

فَتَعَالَيْنَ — "come"

Root: ع-ل-و. To be high. Taʿāla — originally "come up"; in Arabic it has become a common verb of calling.

That the word comes in the feminine plural imperative (taʿālayna) shows the directness of the address.

أُمَتِّعْكُنَّ — "let me give you a provision"

Root: م-ت-ع. It occurred in the sixteenth verse: to derive benefit temporarily.

Here the word comes close to a legal term: mutʿa, a provision given to a woman in the case of divorce. The Qurʾān mentions it in other places too (al-Baqara 2/236, 2/241; al-Aḥzāb 33/49).

I do not enter into legal detail; the schools have adopted different rulings on the amount and the obligatoriness of this provision, and that is not the subject of this commentary.

وَأُسَرِّحْكُنَّ سَرَاحًا جَمِيلًا — "to release in a fair release"

سَرَّحَ — root س-ر-ح. And the concrete sense of the root must be dwelt on: saraḥa'l-māshiyahe let the animals out to pasture. Sarḥ — the herd that goes out to pasture in the morning.

That is, the picture in the word is a setting free — untying the tether and letting out to pasture.

This construction (sarāḥan jamīlā) was recorded at al-Muzzammil, and al-Aḥzāb 33/28 and 33/49 were given there as examples. I rely on that treatment.

جَمِيل — root ج-م-ل. Beautiful. And the root has a striking side: jamal — a camel; jumla — a total. The lexicographers explain jamāl as "the harmony of the whole of a thing".

The construction occurs three times in the Qurʾān, and in all three it qualifies a hard situation:

PlaceThe constructionWhat
al-Ḥijr 15/85fa'ṣfaḥi'l-ṣafḥa'l-jamīlForgiving in a fair way
al-Maʿārij 70/5fa'ṣbir ṣabran jamīlāFair patience — treated at al-Maʿārij
al-Aḥzāb 33/28, 49sarāḥan jamīlāReleasing in a fair way

And in all three the adjective jamīl states how a thing is to be done — not what is to be done.

This is a measure worth recording, and I give it as my own reading: separation is a possibility the verse envisages and it is not forbidden. What is regulated is not the separation itself but its form. The ending of a relationship and its ending badly are different things; the verse removes the second.

What the verse says and what it does not say

A note is needed.

What the verse says: a choice has been offered and both roads are open. For the one who chooses the first road a procedure has been laid down (a provision + a fair release); for the one who chooses the second, a recompense has been announced.

What the verse does not say: what answer the wives gave to this offer. The Qurʾān does not write it.

In the classical sources it is transmitted that all of them chose the second road, and this is given with the note "it is transmitted". The text itself does not contain the answer, and this is not a deficiency: the continuation of the sūra (30-34) is in any case addressed to those who have chosen the second road. The answer is understood from the way the text goes on.

I record this as a datum of the text.

What this says to the present

One. Setting the choice out openly.

What the verse does is to make the terms of a relationship explicit. And it is striking that the party making the offer is the party that wishes to continue the relationship.

Its present-day form is this: laying expectations out openly in a relationship does not weaken the relationship. An expectation not laid out openly turns, when it is not met, into a disappointment; an expectation laid out openly turns into a decision.

Two. The form of the separation is regulated.

Sarāḥan jamīlā is perhaps one of the constructions in this sūra that looks most directly at the present. The ending of a relationship may be unavoidable; the manner of the ending is always a choice.

And the picture in the root of the word supports this: sarḥ is letting an animal out to pasture — that is, the one who is released has an open space before him. The word conveys not abandoning but setting free.


33/30-31

يَٰنِسَآءَ ٱلنَّبِىِّ مَن يَأْتِ مِنكُنَّ بِفَٰحِشَةٍ مُّبَيِّنَةٍ يُضَٰعَفْ لَهَا ٱلْعَذَابُ ضِعْفَيْنِ وَكَانَ ذَٰلِكَ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ يَسِيرًا · وَمَن يَقْنُتْ مِنكُنَّ لِلَّهِ وَرَسُولِهِۦ وَتَعْمَلْ صَٰلِحًا نُّؤْتِهَآ أَجْرَهَا مَرَّتَيْنِ وَأَعْتَدْنَا لَهَا رِزْقًا كَرِيمًا

Yā nisāʾa'l-nabiyyi man yaʾti minkunna bi-fāḥishatin mubayyinatin yuḍāʿaf laha'l-ʿadhābu ḍiʿfayn, wa kāna dhālika ʿala'llāhi yasīrā · Wa man yaqnut minkunna li'llāhi wa rasūlihī wa taʿmal ṣāliḥan nuʾtihā ajrahā marratayni wa aʿtadnā lahā rizqan karīmā

"O women of the Prophet! Whoever among you commits a manifest indecency, the punishment will be doubled for her twofold. That is easy for God. · And whoever among you is devoutly obedient to God and His Messenger and does righteous work, We shall give her her reward twice over; and We have prepared for her a noble provision."

The two faces of a standing

These two verses together say one thing: a standing grows heavier in both directions at once.

Verse 30Verse 31
The actyaʾti bi-fāḥishatin mubayyinayaqnut… wa taʿmal ṣāliḥā
The recompenseyuḍāʿaf… ḍiʿfayn — doubledajrahā marratayn — twice over
The additionrizqan karīmā

And the symmetry is deliberate: the same multiplier is applied in both directions.

This describes what a standing means, and I record it: a standing is neither pure privilege nor pure burden. It is the increase of both at once. I give this as my own reading; its ground is that the two verses use the same multiplier.

يَٰنِسَآءَ ٱلنَّبِىِّ — the change of address

In the twenty-eighth verse the address was to the Prophet (qul li-azwājika). In the thirtieth the address turns directly to them: yā nisāʾa'l-nabiyy.

And the construction changes: in 28 azwājika (your wives), in 30 nisāʾa'l-nabiyy (the women of the Prophet).

This is a datum of the text and I record it. The word azwāj brings forward the bond of spousehood and pairing, nisāʾ the being a woman. And al-nabiyy (the name of the office) is used in the construct — that is, the address is framed by ascription not to a personal bond but to an office.

The construction will occur three times in this block: 30, 32, and in 59 it will return as azwājika.

بِفَٰحِشَةٍ مُّبَيِّنَةٍ — a note of qualification

فَاحِشَة — root ف-ح-ش. An indecency that exceeds all measure. The primary sense of the root is excess: fahusha'l-amr — the matter passed all bounds.

مُبَيِّنَة — root ب-ي-ن. Open, manifest.

And the presence of the qualification mubayyina is important: the verse takes as its subject not any fault whatever but the manifest one. The note narrows the ruling.

The verse is a conditional sentence, and conditional sentences do not report an event that has occurred. In Arabic the structure man … yaʾti sets up a supposition. I enter this note because reading a conditional sentence as though it were an imputation is a common error.

يَقْنُتْ — root ق-ن-ت

Its sense must be dwelt on, because no single English word carries it.

Qunūt, by the definition the lexicographers record: a continuous and silent state of obedience; standing constantly at a task. The word means obedience, humility, and standing for a long time.

The Qurʾān uses the word in striking places: "All that is in the heavens and the earth is qānit to Him" (al-Baqara 2/116); "And Mary was qānita to her Lord" (al-Taḥrīm 66/12).

And that the word was chosen here instead of ṭāʿa (ط-و-ع) is worth noting. In the first verse of the sūra lā tuṭiʿ (do not obey) was used. Here there is qunūt.

The difference is this: ṭāʿa is compliance with a command and may be a single act. Qunūt is a state — it conveys continuity.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the "continuation" sense of the root.

يُضَٰعَفْضِعْفَيْنِ — the reckoning of the doubling

ضَاعَفَ — root ض-ع-ف. And the root has an interesting side: the same root means both weakness (ḍaʿf) and doubling (ḍiʿf).

The lexicographers explain this duality thus: ḍiʿf is the like of a thing added to itself — that is, one more measure of a thing. Its link with weakness comes from the picture of "a thing being doubled over / folded" in the word.

How many times over has been debated in classical exegesis:

ViewWhat it says
TwofoldḌiʿfayn — one more measure, that is, two in all
ThreefoldSince ḍiʿf already means "one more measure", ḍiʿfayn means two more measures, three in all

I do not impose a preference; the lexicographers differ on this. What the verse intends is less a numerical reckoning than a heightening, and the expression marratayn (twice) in the thirty-first verse supports this.

رِزْقًا كَرِيمًا — an added recompense

كَرِيم — root ك-ر-م. Precious, generous, noble. The lexicographers dwell on the concrete sense of the root: karuma'l-arḍ — the soil became fertile, abundant.

And there is an asymmetry in the thirty-first verse: in the thirtieth the recompense is merely doubled; in the thirty-first something further is added on top of the doubling (wa aʿtadnā lahā rizqan karīmā).

That is, the symmetry is broken — and it is broken in favour of the good. This is a pattern that recurs in the Qurʾān and is worth recording: the penalty is equal, the recompense is more.

What this says to the present

A standing is not a privilege.

This is the clearest thing these two verses say. If the place a person occupies increases his visibility, it increases his responsibility too. And the verse frames this not as a threat but as an equation: the same multiplier works in both directions.

Its present-day form holds for any visible position: if what a person does reaches more people because of the place he occupies, then his mistake reaches more people too. This is not an injustice; it is the logic of visibility itself.


33/32

يَٰنِسَآءَ ٱلنَّبِىِّ لَسْتُنَّ كَأَحَدٍ مِّنَ ٱلنِّسَآءِ إِنِ ٱتَّقَيْتُنَّ فَلَا تَخْضَعْنَ بِٱلْقَوْلِ فَيَطْمَعَ ٱلَّذِى فِى قَلْبِهِۦ مَرَضٌ وَقُلْنَ قَوْلًا مَّعْرُوفًا

Yā nisāʾa'l-nabiyyi lastunna ka-aḥadin mina'l-nisāʾi ini'ttaqaytunna fa-lā takhḍaʿna bi'l-qawli fa-yaṭmaʿa'lladhī fī qalbihī maraḍun wa qulna qawlan maʿrūfā

"O women of the Prophet! You are not like any one of the women — if you guard yourselves. So do not be soft and coaxing in your speech; the one in whose heart is sickness will conceive a desire. Speak a fitting word."

لَسْتُنَّ كَأَحَدٍ مِّنَ ٱلنِّسَآءِ — and a condition

The first sentence of the verse looks like a declaration of privilege. What follows corrects that.

إِنِ ٱتَّقَيْتُنَّ — "if you guard yourselves." The sentence is made conditional.

And this is the most important fact of word order in the verse: the distinction comes not from the standing but from the conduct. The standing has been given, but what produces the difference is taqwā.

When the word aḥad was treated at al-Ikhlāṣ, this very verse was given as the example: "Where it occurs in an affirmative sentence it is almost always inside a construct: 'you are not like any one of the women' (al-Aḥzāb 33/32)." I rely on that treatment.

أَحَد — "any one". The word carries an indefiniteness: the sentence does not say "you are not like such-and-such women"; it says "like any one". That is, the comparison is made not with a person but with a category.

And this shows why the sentence is not a sentence of comparison in the belittling sense: no one is being disparaged, a standing is being described.

فَلَا تَخْضَعْنَ بِٱلْقَوْلِ — the form of speech

خَضَعَ — root خ-ض-ع. And the primary sense of the root is to bend, to bow the neck: khaḍaʿa — he lowered himself, he bent. The Qurʾān uses the root of necks: "their necks would bend to it" (al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/4khāḍiʿīn).

And when it joins with the note bi'l-qawl the picture that emerges is: the bending of the voice. That is, something speech does not by its content but by its tone.

In classical exegesis the expression is generally explained thus: speaking with a softened, thinned, coaxing voice.

And the striking side of the verse is this: what is forbidden is not speaking. Indeed the sentence does not end with a prohibition; it ends with a command: wa qulna qawlan maʿrūfā — "speak a fitting word."

That is, the verse does not cut off speech; it regulates its form.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the positive command that follows the prohibition. This is the structure seen in the second verse of the sūra as well: when one direction is closed, another direction is put in its place.

فَيَطْمَعَ ٱلَّذِى فِى قَلْبِهِۦ مَرَضٌ — the ground

طَمِعَ — root ط-م-ع. The desire to obtain a thing; and it is generally used of something to which one has no right. Ṭamaʿ — greed.

فِى قَلْبِهِۦ مَرَضٌ — this expression occurs in the sūra for the second time. Its first occurrence was in the twelfth verse (in the context of the siege).

And the difference between the two occurrences is worth recording:

VerseContextThe symptom of the sickness
12The siegeCounting the promise a delusion
32The houseDrawing a desire out of speech

The same expression, in two entirely different fields. And what joins the two is this: in both, the person draws from something that is there a conclusion that suits his own condition. From the promise, delusion; from speech, an invitation.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the repetition of the expression in two different contexts in the same sūra.

And one further note, per the method (Method): the verse does not lay the whole of the responsibility on the one who speaks. The sentence speaks of a sickness, and the sickness is on the other side. What the verse does is to propose a precaution — not to impute an offence.

قَوْلًا مَّعْرُوفًا — the measure

مَعْرُوف — root ع-ر-ف. It was treated at the sixth verse: what is known, recognised, what everyone agrees to be good.

And its use as a qualification of "speech" is worth noting: qawlan maʿrūfā — "a recognised word". That is, a community's normal, customary, ordinary way of speaking.

The Qurʾān uses this construction elsewhere too (al-Baqara 2/235, 2/263; al-Nisāʾ 4/5, 4/8).

The sūra's axis of "speech" reaches its third link here:

VerseThe speechIts quality
4qawlukum bi-afwāhikumWhat stays in the mouth
32lā takhḍaʿna bi'l-qawl / qawlan maʿrūfāBending / recognised
70qawlan sadīdāFirm, hitting its mark

Three verses, three qualities of speech. And at the very end (70) the sūra will give the positive measure of speech.

What this says to the present

The measure of the verse records the difference between the content of speech and its tone.

This is one of the most practical things that can be said about communication: the same sentence, in different tones, says different things. And tone is read faster than content.

And the measure the verse brings is not a restriction but a call to clarity: qawlan maʿrūfā — let what is said be understood as what it is. Let the tone not load a second message on top of the content.

And the ground the verse gives is also worth noting: the ground is not moral but anticipatory. "The one in whose heart is sickness will conceive a desire" — that is, the verse takes into account a misunderstanding that may form on the other side. This is a model in which responsibility in communication lies not only with the speaker, but in which the speaker too takes the other side into account.


33/33

وَقَرْنَ فِى بُيُوتِكُنَّ وَلَا تَبَرَّجْنَ تَبَرُّجَ ٱلْجَٰهِلِيَّةِ ٱلْأُولَىٰ وَأَقِمْنَ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ وَءَاتِينَ ٱلزَّكَوٰةَ وَأَطِعْنَ ٱللَّهَ وَرَسُولَهُۥٓ إِنَّمَا يُرِيدُ ٱللَّهُ لِيُذْهِبَ عَنكُمُ ٱلرِّجْسَ أَهْلَ ٱلْبَيْتِ وَيُطَهِّرَكُمْ تَطْهِيرًا

Wa qarna fī buyūtikunna wa lā tabarrajna tabarruja'l-jāhiliyyati'l-ūlā, wa aqimna'l-ṣalāta wa ātīna'l-zakāta wa aṭiʿna'llāha wa rasūlah, innamā yurīdu'llāhu li-yudhhiba ʿankumu'l-rijsa ahla'l-bayti wa yuṭahhirakum taṭhīrā

"Stay with dignity in your houses; do not flaunt your finery as in the first age of ignorance. Perform the prayer, give the alms, obey God and His Messenger. God wishes only, O people of the house, to remove the defilement from you and to purify you utterly."

The structure of the verse

The verse consists of two parts, and the two parts speak different languages.

PartContentMoodAddress
The first (5 commands)qarna, lā tabarrajna, aqimna, ātīna, aṭiʿnaImperative, feminine pluralkunna
The secondinnamā yurīdu'llāh…A declarative sentencekummasculine plural

This change of grammatical gender stands at the centre of the whole debate about the verse, and it will be treated separately below.

وَقَرْنَ فِى بُيُوتِكُنَّ — the root of the word and a difference of reading

Which root this word comes from depends on a difference of variant reading, and it changes the meaning.

ReadingRootMeaning
قَرْنَ (with fatḥa)ق-ر-ر — to be fixed, to settle, to come to rest"Settle in your houses / stay there with steadiness"
قِرْنَ (with kasra)ق-و-ر, or another conjugation of ق-ر-ر; on one view و-ق-ر (waqār, dignity)"Be dignified / stay with dignity in your houses"

Both readings are found among the readers, and both are well known.

The concrete sense of the root ق-ر-ر: qarra — to remain fixed in a place, to settle. From the same root qarār (settledness, fixity), mustaqarr (a place of settlement), qurratu ʿayn (the settling of the eye — joy).

The sense of the root و-ق-ر: to be heavy. Waqār — dignity. And at Fuṣṣilat this root occurred as waqr (a heaviness in the ear).

The two readings complete one another: one conveys fixity in a place, the other weight in bearing. Both are accepted in classical exegesis, and no preference is adopted in this commentary.

And a note is needed: this command stands within a block addressed to the Prophet's wives (28-34). The extent of the command — whether it is for them alone or a general measure — has been debated in classical exegesis, and the schools have reached different conclusions. No legal ruling is issued in this commentary; the existence of the debate is recorded.

I record two data that emerge from the text:

One. The addressee of the block is stated explicitly: yā nisāʾa'l-nabiyy (30, 32). The commands stand inside that address.

Two. In verse 59 of the same sūra the address will be widened: "to your wives, your daughters and the believing women". That is, when the sūra wishes to generalise, it does so explicitly. This is an observation; it is not a ruling and does not by itself settle the debate.

وَلَا تَبَرَّجْنَ تَبَرُّجَ ٱلْجَٰهِلِيَّةِ ٱلْأُولَىٰ

تَبَرُّج — root ب-ر-ج. And the concrete sense of the root is visibility: burj — a tower, a bastion; a structure seen from afar because it is high. Tabarrajat — the woman displayed her adornment.

This root was treated as the name of a sūra at al-Burūj, and this verse was already given there as an example: "tabarruj — a woman's displaying her adornment and her beauty, bringing it out into the open." I rely on that treatment.

ٱلْجَٰهِلِيَّة — root ج-ه-ل. Ignorance; and in the Qurʾān it is used as the name of a period.

At al-Fatḥ the four uses of this word in the Qurʾān were given in a table and this verse was included there. What was recorded there: the word is used for surmise (Āl ʿImrān 3/154), ḥamiyya (al-Fatḥ 48/26), judgement (al-Māʾida 5/50) and tabarruj (al-Aḥzāb 33/33).

And what the four uses have in common is worth recording: in the Qurʾān jāhiliyya is used not as a stretch of history but as an attitude. All four name a form of behaviour.

ٱلْأُولَىٰ — "the first" / "the former". Classical exegesis has dwelt on this adjective:

ExplanationWhat it says
The period before the Qurʾān"First" here means "former"
A yet older periodBy "the first ignorance" a more ancient age is meant; the addressee's own period is a separate one
An allusion to a second ignoranceThe adjective implies an ignorance that will come later

I do not impose a preference. And I do not enter into applying the third explanation to contemporary events — the note in Method that "no side is taken in current politics" holds here.

وَأَقِمْنَ ٱلصَّلَوٰةَ وَءَاتِينَ ٱلزَّكَوٰةَ — two basic commands

The placing of these two commands here is worth recording from the point of view of word order.

The first two commands of the verse (qarna, lā tabarrajna) are particular to this block. The third and fourth commands, by contrast, are the Qurʾān's most frequent pair of commands and are required of every believer.

That is, the verse places a general obligation inside a particular address. And this has a function: it says once again that the standing does not produce privilege. In the thirtieth and thirty-first verses responsibility was doubled; here it is stated that the basic obligations continue unchanged.

I record this as my own reading.

The root ص-ل-و will be treated in detail at the fifty-sixth verse; I leave it to there. The root ز-ك-و: to be purified, to grow, to be blessed with increase — in the root of the word there is both purification and growth.

إِنَّمَا يُرِيدُ ٱللَّهُ لِيُذْهِبَ عَنكُمُ ٱلرِّجْسَ أَهْلَ ٱلْبَيْتِ وَيُطَهِّرَكُمْ تَطْهِيرًا

This sentence is one of the most debated sentences of this sūra and perhaps of the Qurʾān. Per the method (Method), a particular care is needed here, and I state the method in advance:

One. The words will be analysed one by one. Two. The data the text gives (grammatical gender, context, construction) will be recorded. Three. The disagreement will be given in a table, with its grounds and impartially. Four. No preference will be imposed, no insinuation will be made against any group, no polemic will be entered. Five. It will be recorded explicitly that a datum of the text does not by itself settle the debate.

The words

إِنَّمَا — the particle of restriction (ḥaṣr): "only, nothing but". It adds a certainty and an exclusivity to the sentence.

يُرِيدُلِيُذْهِبَ — the verb irāda is attached by a lām to a clause of purpose. The lexicographers count the lām in this structure either as emphatic or as causal (giving the ground).

ٱلرِّجْس — root ر-ج-س. And the semantic field of the root is wide: filth, uncleanness; and in the Qurʾān it is used for material dirt, for moral uncleanness and for punishment alike.

The uses in the QurʾānFor what
al-Anʿām 6/125The state laid upon those who do not believe
al-Māʾida 5/90Wine, gambling, the set-up stones and the divining arrows
al-Tawba 9/125The increase of the filth in hearts
al-Aḥzāb 33/33The thing that is to be removed

In this verse the word comes with the definite article (al-rijs) — that is, something definite and known. What is meant is not explained in the verse.

طَهَّرَ — root ط-ه-ر. Purity. This root was treated at al-Mujādala, al-Insān and al-Muddaththir. The concrete sense of the root is material cleanliness; the Qurʾān uses it for moral purification as well.

تَطْهِيرًا — a cognate accusative. Again a reinforcement (as in verses 11 and 23). This is the third cognate accusative in the sūra:

VerseStructure
11zulzilū zilzālan shadīdā
23mā baddalū tabdīlā
33yuṭahhirakum taṭhīrā

And the same pattern will come again in verse 56 (sallimū taslīmā).

أَهْلَ ٱلْبَيْت — the construction

أَهْل — root أ-ه-ل. Those who live in a place, the possessors of a thing, a person's close kin. It occurred at al-Fatḥ 48/11 as ahlūnā (our families).

بَيْت — root ب-ي-ت. A house; and the primary sense of the root is to pass the night (bāta — he passed the night). That is, in the root of the word a house is "the place where one passes the night".

The construction occurs in two places in the Qurʾān:

PlaceContext
Hūd 11/73The angels' word to Abraham's wife: raḥmatu'llāhi wa barakātuhu ʿalaykum ahla'l-bayt
al-Aḥzāb 33/33This verse

Hūd 11/73 is a parallel worth recording and is a neutral datum of the text: there the address is directed to Abraham's wife (in the preceding verse imraʾatuhu — his wife — is named) and the construction is used as ahla'l-bayt, with a masculine plural pronoun (ʿalaykum).

I record this datum but frame no ruling upon it.

The change of grammatical gender — a datum of the text

There is a change of grammatical gender in the verse, and this stands at the centre of the debate.

PartPronounGender
qarna fī buyūtikunnakunnaFeminine plural
lā tabarrajna-naFeminine plural
aqimna, ātīna, aṭiʿna-naFeminine plural
*li-yudhhiba ʿankumkumMasculine plural
*wa yuṭahhirakumkumMasculine plural
wa'dhkurna (verse 34)-naFeminine plural

This is an undisputed fact of the text and both sides accept it. The divergence is over how the fact is to be interpreted.

The disagreement — with its grounds

The table below conveys impartially the principal views found in the classical exegetical literature and their grounds. No view is preferred, and no insinuation is made against any group.

ViewExtentIts groundsThe objection of the other side
A. The Prophet's wives aloneThe ahl al-bayt in the verse are the wives who are the addressees of verses 28-34(1) Context: what precedes and what follows address the wives throughout; (2) in Arabic the masculine plural is used when a man is present within a group, or in agreement with a masculine word such as ahl; (3) at Hūd 11/73 the same construction occurs with a masculine pronoun in an address to Abraham's wifeThat the change of gender falls exactly at this sentence is striking; and it is stated that there are reports to the contrary
B. The close members of the Prophet's familyAhl al-bayt are particular persons among the Prophet's close kin(1) The change of gender; (2) the reports transmitted to this effect; (3) that the particle innamā conveys exclusivityThe context before and after addresses the wives; the placing of a ruling detached from the context in the middle of the sentence requires explanation
C. Both togetherThe construction covers both the wives and the close family(1) The wide sense of the word ahl; (2) a reading in which the context indicates the wives and the change of gender indicates a wideningIt is said that this fully meets neither side's grounds

After this table I enter five notes:

One. No view is preferred in this commentary. Per the principle of Method that "if a preference is adopted its ground is written and the note that it is not binding is entered": no preference has been adopted here, because the question stands at the centre of a disagreement between the schools, and to prefer would be to insinuate something against one side.

Two. That the context concerns the wives is a datum of the text. The whole of verses 28-34 addresses the wives; so does what precedes and what follows verse 33. I record this as a datum.

Three. And this datum does not by itself settle the debate. The reasons: (a) the lexicographers have recorded that there are rulings in the Qurʾān which extend beyond the context of a sentence; (b) the change of gender is a fact that itself requires explanation; (c) the question rests not on language alone but on transmitted material too.

Four. The material of the reports is not entered into in this commentary. Reports are transmitted in both directions; the evaluation of those reports is the business of the science of ḥadīth and cannot be done here. Per the note in Method that "you are not to ascribe a saying of which you are not sure", no name, wording or source is given.

Five. This verse cannot be used to exalt one group or to exclude another — on any reading. The wording of the verse states a will: yurīdu'llāhu li-yudhhiba. A statement of will is not a claim of superiority.

What the sentence says on its own

Setting the debate aside, I record three things that emerge from the wording of the sentence. These are offered as evidence for no view.

One. The sentence is a sentence of purification, not a sentence of privilege. There are two verbs: to remove the defilement and to purify. Both convey an operation, not a status.

Two. The sentence stands in the middle of the commands around it. Before it there are five commands, after it one more (34: wa'dhkurna). That is, the statement of purification has been placed in the middle of the obligations — not after them.

This is a fact of word order worth recording, and I give it as my own reading: purification has been positioned not as something that takes the place of the obligations but as something standing inside them.

Three. What al-rijs is is not explained in the verse. In classical exegesis explanations such as sin, doubt and filth are given; the verse gives no definition.

What this says to the present

In speaking about this verse the place where the greatest care must be taken is what the verse can be used for.

Because it stands at the centre of a dispute, the verse is often read less for its own content than as a position. And this is the most harmful thing that can be done to any text: the text becomes unable to say what it says.

What the sentence says on its own is plain: a will to purify is stated, and this statement is placed in the middle of a series of obligations.

And a measure emerges that agrees with the sūra as a whole: from the beginning the sūra says that a name does not change reality. The name of a standing — being a wife, being of the people of the house — does not of itself bring with it what that standing requires. Indeed the thirty-second verse had made this explicitly conditional: lastunna ka-aḥadin mina'l-nisāʾi ini'ttaqaytunna.

I record this as my own reading, and I draw no conclusion for or against any side.


33/34

وَٱذْكُرْنَ مَا يُتْلَىٰ فِى بُيُوتِكُنَّ مِنْ ءَايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ وَٱلْحِكْمَةِ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ لَطِيفًا خَبِيرًا

Wa'dhkurna mā yutlā fī buyūtikunna min āyāti'llāhi wa'l-ḥikmah, inna'llāha kāna laṭīfan khabīrā

"And remember what is recited in your houses of the verses of God and the wisdom. God is Subtle, Aware."

The close of the block

The block 28-34 ends here, and the close is made with a command: wa'dhkurna.

The root ذ-ك-ر occupies an important place in this sūra: 21 (dhakara'llāha kathīrā), 34 (here), 35 (al-dhākirīna'llāha kathīran wa'l-dhākirāt), 41 (udhkuru'llāha dhikran kathīrā).

And all four are gathered in the same group of blocks. From the condition of exemplarity (21) to the general command (41) the sūra repeats remembrance.

مَا يُتْلَىٰ فِى بُيُوتِكُنَّ — "what is recited in your houses"

تَلَا — root ت-ل-و. To go behind, to follow; and from this "to recite" — the letters following one another. Tilāwa — recitation.

The verb is passive and imperfect: yutlā — "what is being recited". That is, an ongoing recitation is described.

فِى بُيُوتِكُنَّ — "in your houses". The word bayt occurs for the second time in this passage (in 33 as ahla'l-bayt, here as buyūtikunna) and is a link in the sūra's axis of "the house".

And the striking side of this verse is this: the house is named as the place where the revelation comes down. That is, in the sūra the house is at once a boundary to be protected (53), a place to stay in with dignity (33), and the place where the revelation is recited.

I record this as my own reading.

وَٱلْحِكْمَة — "and the wisdom"

Root: ح-ك-م. And the concrete sense of the root is to restrain, to rein in: ḥakama'l-dābba — he put the bit into the animal's mouth. Ḥakama — a bit. From this ḥukm, ḥikma, ḥakīm.

This concrete sense of the root is worth recording: wisdom is not the heaping up of knowledge; it is holding a thing in its place. A bit does not stop the animal — it steers it.

What the distinction of "the verses and the wisdom" is has been debated in classical exegesis:

ExplanationWhat it says
The Qurʾān and the SunnaĀyāt the Qurʾān, ḥikma the Prophet's explanations
The Qurʾān and the meaning within itĀyāt the wording, ḥikma the depth the wording carries
Both the QurʾānThe construction expresses a single whole from two sides

I do not impose a preference. The pair "the Book and the wisdom" occurs in several places in the Qurʾān (al-Baqara 2/129, 2/151; Āl ʿImrān 3/164; al-Jumuʿa 62/2treated at al-Jumuʿa).

لَطِيفًا خَبِيرًا — the verse-ending

لَطِيف — root ل-ط-ف. And the semantic field of the root goes in two directions: fineness (being too fine to be seen with the eye) and graciousness (acting gently).

The lexicographers join the two thus: laṭīf is the one who can reach what is fine; and the one who acts finely. That is, it has both a side of knowing and a side of dealing.

خَبِير — root خ-ب-ر. To know the inner truth of a thing. And the lexicographers dwell on the concrete sense of the root: khabara'l-arḍ — he ploughed the earth and saw what was beneath it. That is, khubr is knowledge of what lies below the surface.

The coming of the two names together is worth noting and agrees with the verse: the verse speaks of something that takes place inside houses — the verses recited. And the verse-ending closes with two names that penetrate what is hidden.

And the course of the verse-endings across the block is worth recording:

VerseThe verse-endingWhat
29ajran ʿaẓīmāRecompense
30ʿala'llāhi yasīrāEase
31rizqan karīmāRecompense
34laṭīfan khabīrāKnowing

The block begins with recompense and ends with knowing. And this agrees with the subject of the block: the house is the place not seen from outside.

I record this as my own reading.


33/35

إِنَّ ٱلْمُسْلِمِينَ وَٱلْمُسْلِمَٰتِ وَٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ وَٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ وَٱلْقَٰنِتِينَ وَٱلْقَٰنِتَٰتِ وَٱلصَّٰدِقِينَ وَٱلصَّٰدِقَٰتِ وَٱلصَّٰبِرِينَ وَٱلصَّٰبِرَٰتِ وَٱلْخَٰشِعِينَ وَٱلْخَٰشِعَٰتِ وَٱلْمُتَصَدِّقِينَ وَٱلْمُتَصَدِّقَٰتِ وَٱلصَّٰٓئِمِينَ وَٱلصَّٰٓئِمَٰتِ وَٱلْحَٰفِظِينَ فُرُوجَهُمْ وَٱلْحَٰفِظَٰتِ وَٱلذَّٰكِرِينَ ٱللَّهَ كَثِيرًا وَٱلذَّٰكِرَٰتِ أَعَدَّ ٱللَّهُ لَهُم مَّغْفِرَةً وَأَجْرًا عَظِيمًا

Inna'l-muslimīna wa'l-muslimāti wa'l-muʾminīna wa'l-muʾmināti wa'l-qānitīna wa'l-qānitāti wa'l-ṣādiqīna wa'l-ṣādiqāti wa'l-ṣābirīna wa'l-ṣābirāti wa'l-khāshiʿīna wa'l-khāshiʿāti wa'l-mutaṣaddiqīna wa'l-mutaṣaddiqāti wa'l-ṣāʾimīna wa'l-ṣāʾimāti wa'l-ḥāfiẓīna furūjahum wa'l-ḥāfiẓāti wa'l-dhākirīna'llāha kathīran wa'l-dhākirāt — aʿadda'llāhu lahum maghfiratan wa ajran ʿaẓīmā

"Indeed the Muslim men and the Muslim women, the believing men and the believing women, the devoutly obedient men and the devoutly obedient women, the truthful men and the truthful women, the patient men and the patient women, the humble men and the humble women, the men who give alms and the women who give alms, the fasting men and the fasting women, the men who guard their chastity and the women who guard, the men who remember God much and the women who remember — God has prepared for them forgiveness and a great reward."

The longest parallel enumeration in the Qurʾān

This verse is the longest parallel enumeration of man and woman in the Qurʾān: ten pairs, twenty words.

It was mentioned as "the widest example" at al-Burūj and at Nūḥ; here it is opened up.

The list

#Masculine formFeminine formRootWhat
1ٱلْمُسْلِمِينٱلْمُسْلِمَٰتس-ل-مThe one who submits — who leaves himself entire
2ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتأ-م-نThe one who trusts, gives security, assents
3ٱلْقَٰنِتِينٱلْقَٰنِتَٰتق-ن-تThe one who stands in continual obedience
4ٱلصَّٰدِقِينٱلصَّٰدِقَٰتص-د-قThe truthful; whose word is firm
5ٱلصَّٰبِرِينٱلصَّٰبِرَٰتص-ب-رThe one who holds himself
6ٱلْخَٰشِعِينٱلْخَٰشِعَٰتخ-ش-عThe one who lowers himself, who bows
7ٱلْمُتَصَدِّقِينٱلْمُتَصَدِّقَٰتص-د-قThe one who gives alms
8ٱلصَّٰٓئِمِينٱلصَّٰٓئِمَٰتص-و-مThe one who keeps himself from a thing — who fasts
9ٱلْحَٰفِظِين فُرُوجَهُمْٱلْحَٰفِظَٰتح-ف-ظThe one who guards his chastity
10ٱلذَّٰكِرِين ٱللَّهَ كَثِيرًاٱلذَّٰكِرَٰتذ-ك-رThe one who remembers God much

A note on some of the roots

Most of the roots have been analysed earlier in this commentary; I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them.

  • س-ل-م — treated at verse 22 (taslīm): the concrete sense of the root is wholeness.
  • أ-م-ن — treated at al-Baqara and al-Ḥujurāt; and it will return in verse 72 of this sūra as amāna. The same root occurs in this verse of the sūra as an attribute and at its close as a burden.
  • ق-ن-ت — treated at verse 31: obedience that conveys continuity.
  • ص-د-ق — treated at verses 8, 22, 23 and 24: truthfulness; and the concrete side of the root, firmness.
  • ص-ب-ر — treated at al-Ḥujurāt 49/5: the primary sense of the root is to hold, to confine.
  • ذ-ك-ر — occurred at verses 21 and 34; it will return as a command in verse 41.

Three roots need to be opened up here for the first time:

خ-ش-ع — To be lowered, to bend, the sinking of the voice. For the concrete sense of the root the lexicographers give the earth as an example: khashaʿati'l-arḍ — the ground sank, it was lowered. The Qurʾān uses this root for the sinking of voices too: "And voices are hushed before the All-Merciful" (Ṭāhā 20/108khashaʿati'l-aṣwāt).

ص-و-م — And the primary sense of the root is interesting: to hold oneself back from a thing, to stop. In Arabic ṣāma'l-nahār — the day reached its midpoint and the sun seemed to stand still; ṣāmati'l-khayl — the horses stopped eating their fodder. That is, ṣawm in its root is not "abstaining from food" but "standing still". The Qurʾān uses the root for not speaking too: "I have vowed a ṣawm to the All-Merciful" (Maryam 19/26) — there the fast is silence.

ح-ف-ظ — To guard, to watch over, to preserve. Ḥifẓ — memorisation (taking into safekeeping). Ḥāfiẓ — the one who guards.

A point of word order — one of the most striking structures in the sūra

Now the real matter: the form of this list.

In this verse the Qurʾān has chosen one thing: to repeat every attribute twice, in two gender forms.

And an alternative was possible. In Arabic the masculine plural can be used for a mixed group, and this is the normal working of the language. Had the verse gone on inna'l-muslimīna wa'l-muʾminīna wa'l-qānitīna…, it would grammatically have covered women too, and the verse would have been half as long.

The Qurʾān does not do this. It raises ten words to twenty.

And this repetition itself carries information. I record it as my own reading and set out its grounds.

One. An inclusive masculine form does not show what it includes. At the level of grammar the inclusion is there; but the person reading the list hears one gender. The verse takes the inclusion out of grammar and carries it into the wording. The inclusion is no longer a piece of information about a rule but something heard.

Two. The repetition changes the rhythm of the list. When the verse is recited every attribute comes twice, and the only difference between them is a gender ending. This sets the sound-structure of the verse into the rhythm of a pair — and this rhythm is repeated ten times. The verse says what it says with its sound as well.

Three. The length is itself an emphasis. There is no other such long dual enumeration in the Qurʾān. The length itself shows that the verse is not an exception but a deliberate choice.

Four. And the kind of attributes in the list is worth noting. Ten attributes are enumerated and not one of them is particular to a sex. Submission, faith, obedience, truthfulness, patience, humility, almsgiving, fasting, chastity, remembrance — all of them are things both sides can do. That is, the verse describes a shared field and names every item of that field twice.

The two places where the symmetry breaks

And at the end of the list the symmetry breaks twice. This is a fact of the text that must be recorded.

PairMasculineFeminineThe difference
9al-ḥāfiẓīna furūjahumwa'l-ḥāfiẓātThe object only in the first
10al-dhākirīna'llāha kathīranwa'l-dhākirātThe object and the adverb only in the first

In the first eight pairs both sides are named in exactly the same form. In the last two pairs the object is said only once.

The lexicographers explain this thus: in Arabic a complement mentioned in the first element need not be repeated in the second; in the second it is counted as elided (maḥdhūf) and the sense is not diminished. This is a widespread rule of economy in the language.

That is, in point of meaning there is no difference: the women who guard their chastity and the women who remember God much have been named in the same way.

But there is a fact of rhythm, and I record it: the verse keeps up the full repetition through eight pairs and shortens the repetition in the last two. And this produces a close that accelerates towards the end of the list — the sentence gathers itself after a long repetition and passes at once to the closing clause: aʿadda'llāhu lahum…

I record this as an observation about style; I draw no ruling from it.

أَعَدَّ ٱللَّهُ لَهُم — the close

And in the close the pronoun is masculine plural: lahum.

This is the normal working of the language: a pronoun returning to a mixed list of twenty items is masculine plural in Arabic.

And one further thing becomes visible here: having divided the list in two, the verse gives the recompense with a single pronoun. That is, the dividing is in the enumeration, the joining in the recompense.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the list is separated and the verse-ending joined.

مَّغْفِرَةً وَأَجْرًا عَظِيمًا — two recompenses: forgiveness and a great reward. The same verse-ending occurred in verse 29 as well (ajran ʿaẓīmā), and as was recorded at al-Fatḥ this is the pattern that states the recompense of an undertaking.

Context — why the verse is here

The verse's place in the sūra is no accident.

The preceding seven verses (28-34) addressed a particular group: the Prophet's wives. And in that block a particular standing, a particular responsibility and a particular measure were described.

The thirty-fifth verse, immediately afterwards, opens the extent all the way.

And this transition is worth recording: having recounted the particular situation of one group, the sūra gives, on the same page, a list that takes in everyone. That is, the particular does not annul the general.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the succession of the two blocks.

And the thirty-sixth verse that follows will be of the same width: mā kāna li-muʾminin wa lā muʾmina. That is, in verses 35 and 36 the sūra uses the man-woman pair twice in succession — once as a list of attributes, once as a ruling.

What this says to the present

What this verse says to the present comes less from its content than from its form.

A text can say what it includes in two ways: by a rule, or by repetition. A rule is economical but invisible; repetition is expensive but visible.

This verse chooses the second and pays the price: twenty words instead of ten.

And its counterpart is this: a person whose name does not appear in a list does not find himself in that list, even if he knows the rule includes him. Naming is not inclusion itself — but it is the feeling of inclusion.

I record this as my own reading. And I record too that it carries an interesting tension with the founding principle of the sūra: from the beginning the sūra has been saying "a name does not change reality". This verse, by contrast, shows that naming does a piece of work — not in changing reality but in showing it. The two do not conflict: in the fourth verse a name was trying to make present something that was not there; here a name makes visible something that is.


33/36

وَمَا كَانَ لِمُؤْمِنٍ وَلَا مُؤْمِنَةٍ إِذَا قَضَى ٱللَّهُ وَرَسُولُهُۥٓ أَمْرًا أَن يَكُونَ لَهُمُ ٱلْخِيَرَةُ مِنْ أَمْرِهِمْ وَمَن يَعْصِ ٱللَّهَ وَرَسُولَهُۥ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ ضَلَٰلًا مُّبِينًا

Wa mā kāna li-muʾminin wa lā muʾminatin idhā qaḍa'llāhu wa rasūluhu amran an yakūna lahumu'l-khiyaratu min amrihim, wa man yaʿṣi'llāha wa rasūlahu fa-qad ḍalla ḍalālan mubīnā

"When God and His Messenger have decided a matter, it is not for a believing man or a believing woman to have a choice in that matter of theirs. And whoever disobeys God and His Messenger has strayed into a manifest straying."

The entry to the section on Zayd

This verse is a principle placed before the account in the thirty-seventh verse. The method of the sūra is visible once more here: first the principle, then the application.

The fourth and fifth verses had abolished the ascription of the adopted son; the thirty-sixth verse says that the right of choice falls away in the face of a decision; and the thirty-seventh will recount the concrete event where these two intersect.

وَمَا كَانَ لِمُؤْمِنٍ وَلَا مُؤْمِنَةٍ — the repetition of the pair

Immediately after the thirty-fifth verse, the man-woman pair is used once more.

And here the function of the repetition is different: in verse 35 it was a list of recompense, here it is an obligation. The Qurʾān says both in the same dual form.

I record this as a datum of the text: on the same page the sūra names both the right and the obligation separately for the two sexes.

Since it comes indefinite and in a negative context it conveys generality: "for no believing man and no believing woman".

ٱلْخِيَرَة — root خ-ي-ر

The right of choice, preference. From the same root as khayr (good).

This duality of the root is worth noting: in Arabic khayr means "what is good"; and ikhtiyār, "to choose what is good". That is, the word for choice carries a value judgement in its root.

And the word al-khiyara occurs in two places in the Qurʾān: here and at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/68 (mā kāna lahumu'l-khiyara — there too it is said that the authority of choice is not with people).

مِنْ أَمْرِهِمْ — the limit of the note

This note is important and is generally skipped. The verse does not say "they have no right of choice in anything". It speaks of a field bounded by a conditional clause: idhā qaḍa'llāhu wa rasūluhu amran — "when they have decided a matter."

That is, the right of choice is not abolished in general; it is said that in a matter about which a decision has been made, one cannot set oneself against that decision.

And the word amr occurs twice in the verse: qaḍa'llāhu… amran and min amrihim. The same word, once the subject of the decision, once the affair of the people. The word order shows the place where the two coincide.

قَضَى — root ق-ض-ي

To complete a matter, to settle it by a decision, to finish it. It occurred in the twenty-third verse as qaḍā naḥbah.

In the root of the word there is a finishedness and it agrees with the logic of the verse: if a decision has been made, the matter is closed.

فَقَدْ ضَلَّ ضَلَٰلًا مُّبِينًا — the verse-ending

ضَلَّ — root ض-ل-ل. To lose the way, to stray; and the concrete sense of the root is to be lost inside something: ḍalla'l-māʾu fi'l-laban — the water was lost in the milk.

Again a cognate accusative: ḍalla ḍalālan mubīnā. The fourth reinforcement in the sūra.

What this says to the present

The measure of the verse regulates the order between decision and objection.

And what is striking is this: the verse takes as its subject not objection itself but its timing. The discussion before a decision is made is not the subject of the verse. The subject is the claim of choice that begins after the decision has been made.

Its present-day form holds for any process of shared decision: to object before a decision is taken is a part of the process; to say "I do not go along" after it has been taken annuls not the decision but the process.

I record this as my own reading, and I do not confuse the religious context of the verse with this general observation.


33/37

وَإِذْ تَقُولُ لِلَّذِىٓ أَنْعَمَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَأَنْعَمْتَ عَلَيْهِ أَمْسِكْ عَلَيْكَ زَوْجَكَ وَٱتَّقِ ٱللَّهَ وَتُخْفِى فِى نَفْسِكَ مَا ٱللَّهُ مُبْدِيهِ وَتَخْشَى ٱلنَّاسَ وَٱللَّهُ أَحَقُّ أَن تَخْشَىٰهُ فَلَمَّا قَضَىٰ زَيْدٌ مِّنْهَا وَطَرًا زَوَّجْنَٰكَهَا لِكَىْ لَا يَكُونَ عَلَى ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ حَرَجٌ فِىٓ أَزْوَٰجِ أَدْعِيَآئِهِمْ إِذَا قَضَوْا۟ مِنْهُنَّ وَطَرًا وَكَانَ أَمْرُ ٱللَّهِ مَفْعُولًا

Wa idh taqūlu li'lladhī anʿama'llāhu ʿalayhi wa anʿamta ʿalayhi amsik ʿalayka zawjaka wa'ttaqi'llāha wa tukhfī fī nafsika ma'llāhu mubdīhi wa takhsha'l-nāsa wa'llāhu aḥaqqu an takhshāh, fa-lammā qaḍā Zaydun minhā waṭaran zawwajnākahā li-kay lā yakūna ʿala'l-muʾminīna ḥarajun fī azwāji adʿiyāʾihim idhā qaḍaw minhunna waṭarā, wa kāna amru'llāhi mafʿūlā

"And when you were saying to the one whom God had favoured and whom you had favoured, 'Keep your wife with you, and guard yourself against God.' You were hiding within yourself what God was to bring out, and you were wary of people; whereas God was the one you should have been wary of. Then, when Zayd had ended his tie with her, We married her to you, so that there should be no difficulty for the believers regarding the wives of their adopted sons, once they have ended their tie with them. And the command of God is carried out."

How I shall read this section

This verse is one of the most disputed and most abused places in the Qurʾān. I state the method in advance:

One. The account's link with the ruling in verses 4-5 will be shown — the sūra lays down a principle and recounts its application. Two. The imputations circulating in the Isrāʾīliyyāt and story-telling literature about the expression tukhfī fī nafsika will not be entered into. That these imputations were rejected in classical exegesis will be recorded in the language of "it is transmitted", and I shall keep within what the wording of the verse says. Three. The woman's name will not be given; the details of the reports about how the marriage was made and how it ended will not be entered into. The only name the Qurʾān gives is Zayd.

The only Companion named in the Qurʾān

As was recorded at al-Masad: Zayd is named by name at al-Aḥzāb 33/37 — the only place where a Companion's name occurs in the Qurʾān. I rely on that treatment.

And this is a fact worth recording. The Qurʾān scarcely ever names the people of its own period — neither friend nor enemy. The reason was recorded at al-Munāfiqūn: "the description lasts, the exposure passes."

And precisely for that reason, where the single exception is made matters.

In the verse Zayd's name occurs at the very middle of the sentence: fa-lammā qaḍā Zaydun minhā waṭarā. And up to that moment the same person had been named not by his name but by a description: "the one whom God had favoured and whom you had favoured."

I record this as my own reading: the place where the verse gives the name is the place where the ruling is established. A name is written into the Qurʾān in the very context in which the ascription that name carried (Zayd b. Muḥammad) is abolished. That is, what is abolished is not a name but a corrected ascription; and in doing this the Qurʾān enters the person's own name into the record.

This is an inference and not a transmitted report. Its ground is the position of the name within the verse.

أَنْعَمَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَأَنْعَمْتَ عَلَيْهِ — two favours

The same verb (anʿama), with two different subjects, one after the other.

The verse does not say what they were. In classical exegesis it is said that the first was guidance and the second a kindness the Prophet had done him. I do not enter into detail.

But the word order does a piece of work and I record it: the verse introduces the person by way of a relationship. And both directions of the relationship are named: what came from God and what came from the Prophet.

And this introduction weighs down the situation that follows in the verse: a word said to a person to whom kindness has been done is not an ordinary piece of advice.

أَمْسِكْ عَلَيْكَ زَوْجَكَ وَٱتَّقِ ٱللَّهَ — the word that was said

أَمْسِكْ — root م-س-ك. To hold, to keep in hand, not to let go. Mask — holding; imsāk — holding, keeping back (the imsāk of fasting is from the same root).

عَلَيْكَ — "with you". The preposition shows that the holding is within a field belonging to the person.

The construction occurs in the Qurʾān in the context of divorce too: "Either holding on in a fitting way (imsāk bi-maʿrūf) or releasing in a fair way" (al-Baqara 2/229). That is, imsāk is the opposite of tasrīḥ (which occurred in verse 28).

And this link is worth recording within the sūra: in the twenty-eighth verse a sarāḥan jamīlā was offered to the Prophet's wives; in the thirty-seventh the Prophet advises imsāk to someone else. The same pair of words, in two different places.

وَٱتَّقِ ٱللَّهَ — the very same command as in the first verse of the sūra. There it was said to the Prophet; here the Prophet says it to someone else.

وَتُخْفِى فِى نَفْسِكَ مَا ٱللَّهُ مُبْدِيهِ

This is the most disputed place in the verse, and here, per the method (Method), I draw a firm limit.

What the wording of the verse says:

1. The Prophet was hiding something within himself. 2. God was going to bring it out. 3. The Prophet was wary of people. 4. The one to be wary of was God.

What the wording of the verse does not say: what the thing hidden was. The verse does not give it.

In the classical exegetical literature there are two kinds of material on this, and the two must be kept apart.

The first kind — imputations of story-telling and Isrāʾīliyyāt origin. In this literature detailed and tendentious narratives circulate about what the hidden thing was.

This commentary does not enter into these narratives, and I record this: it is widely transmitted that in the classical exegetical tradition these imputations were rejected. A considerable number of exegetes characterised these narratives as material with no source value, without a chain of transmission, or inconsistent under textual criticism, and rejected them.

I give this in the language of "it is transmitted" and mention no name or wording, because the note in Method is plain: a saying of which one is not sure is not ascribed to an exegete.

The second kind — explanations resting on the wording of the verse. In classical exegesis there are also explanations of what the hidden thing may have been that keep within the verse's own sentences:

ExplanationWhat it saysIts ground in the verse
Knowledge of a coming rulingThe Prophet knew that he had been informed this marriage would take place, and did not disclose it because he was wary of people's reactionma'llāhu mubdīh — "what God was to bring out"; and the clause of ground at the end of the verse
That the marriage would endThe thing hidden was knowledge that that marriage would not continueThe same sentence

I do not impose a preference. But I record this: the first explanation agrees with the verse's own clause of ground. The verse writes the reason for the event explicitly: li-kay lā yakūna ʿala'l-muʾminīna ḥarajun fī azwāji adʿiyāʾihim. That is, the ground the verse gives is legal and links directly with verses 4-5.

This is an observation, not a ruling.

وَتَخْشَى ٱلنَّاسَ وَٱللَّهُ أَحَقُّ أَن تَخْشَىٰهُ — a correction

خَشِىَ — root خ-ش-ي. To fear; and what the lexicographers record about its difference from khawf: khashya is fear resting on knowledge and on reverence. Khawf is more general.

And this sentence is one of the examples of a fact treated at ʿAbasa. What was recorded there and what I bring over here:

  • There are places in the Qurʾān where a choice of the Prophet's is corrected, and they were given as a list: al-Tawba 9/43, al-Anfāl 8/67-68, al-Aḥzāb 33/37, al-Taḥrīm 66/1.
  • This was presented not as a proof but as an observation.
  • It was also recorded there that in a report stated to be found in al-Bukhārī and Muslim it is transmitted that ʿĀʾisha said of this verse something to the effect that had Muhammad been going to conceal anything of the revelation, he would have concealed this verse — its wording not quoted verbatim, its sense given.

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat that section.

I add one thing here and record it as my own reading: what the verse corrects is not a sin but an order of priority. In the sentence the elative aḥaqqu (having more right) is used — that is, being wary of people is not forbidden, it is put in order.

And this links with the first verse of the sūra: "do not obey the disbelievers and the hypocrites." There too the matter was aligning oneself with people's expectations. The sūra repeats the same matter thirty-six verses later for the Prophet himself.

I record this link as my own reading; its ground is that both verses fix an attitude in the face of "people's reaction".

فَلَمَّا قَضَىٰ زَيْدٌ مِّنْهَا وَطَرًا — the delicacy of the expression

وَطَر — root و-ط-ر. The need, want or business a person looks for from a thing. Qaḍā waṭarahu — he finished his business, he met his need.

The construction occurs only in this verse in the Qurʾān — and twice in this verse.

And the choice of the expression is worth recording. The verse does not say "he divorced her" (ṭallaqa). The expression it uses is a veiled way of stating that the relationship had in fact ended.

This is the level of language the Qurʾān prefers in such matters and it agrees with the measure recorded at al-Muzzammil: in matters that enter the field of privacy the Qurʾān chooses indirect expression.

And the expression occurs twice in the verse so that at the second occurrence it may be tied to the general ruling: idhā qaḍaw minhunna waṭarā. The same expression, once a single event and once a general rule. The word order makes the passage from event to ruling by repeating the word.

زَوَّجْنَٰكَهَا — the naming of the agent

The verb is first person plural: "We married her to you."

This is the most striking grammatical fact of the verse and must be recorded. The sentence does not say "he married her" or "you married her". The agent of the verb is stated directly.

And this has a function: the event is presented not as a personal choice but as the application of a ruling. Indeed the verse gives the ground immediately afterwards.

I record this as a datum of the text.

لِكَىْ لَا يَكُونَ عَلَى ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ حَرَجٌ — the clause of ground

This is the most important sentence in the verse, because the verse itself says why the event took place.

حَرَج — root ح-ر-ج. And the concrete sense of the root is narrowness, constriction: ḥaraj — a place hard to get into, cramped; ground thick with trees that gives no passage.

The Qurʾān uses the root in several places: "He has laid upon you no difficulty (ḥaraj) in religion" (al-Ḥajj 22/78); "his breast becomes tight and constricted (ḥarajan)" (al-Anʿām 6/125).

And the clause of ground links directly with the fourth and fifth verses:

VerseWhat it did
33/4mā jaʿala adʿiyāʾakum abnāʾakum — adopted sons are not sons by birth
33/5udʿūhum li-ābāʾihim — call them by their fathers
33/37li-kay lā yakūna ʿala'l-muʾminīna ḥarajun fī azwāji adʿiyāʾihim

The same word — أَدْعِيَآء — occurs in all three verses. And this completes the structure of the sūra: the principle was laid down (4-5), its application recounted (37).

And why the application was needed can be understood: the legal abolition of an institution does not of itself abolish that institution's social effect. It had been said that an adopted son is not counted a son; but in people's minds the ascription went on. The verse puts an end to that continuation by an application.

And this is the hardest test of the sūra's founding principle, and I record it: the fourth verse had said "a name does not change reality". But there is something a name establishes socially, and that is not undone by a sentence. The sūra is aware of this and therefore follows the principle with an application.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the clause of ground is given explicitly inside the verse.

وَكَانَ أَمْرُ ٱللَّهِ مَفْعُولًا — the verse-ending

مَفْعُول — a passive participle: "that which has been done". That is, the command is named not as something still to be done but as something done.

The construction occurs in several places in the Qurʾān and always conveys a certainty (al-Nisāʾ 4/47; al-Anfāl 8/42).

A note on the details of the reports

A great many details circulate about this verse in the classical and modern literature: how the marriage was made, what the parties thought, the cause of the separation, the date of the event.

These details are not entered into in this commentary. The reasons:

One. The reports differ from one another at the level of detail, and per the method (Method) a detail of which one is not sure cannot be presented as certain knowledge.

Two. The wording of the verse gives none of these details. To make a piece of information the Qurʾān does not give into a condition of a verse's meaning is a breach of the three-layered frame set up at al-Fatḥ.

Three. The verse gives its ground itself. When the reason for an event is written in the text, looking outside for another reason is unnecessary.

What this says to the present

One. The abolition of an institution and the abolition of its effect are different things.

This is exactly the ground the verse gives. The legal regulation has been made (4-5); but people's behaviour continues. And to change the behaviour the verse does not write another legal text — it shows an application.

This can be recorded as an observation about social change: for a habit to fall away it is not enough for the rule to change; it must be seen that the rule works.

Two. Being wary of people's reaction.

The most human sentence in the verse is wa takhsha'l-nās. And the verse does not stamp this as a weakness; it corrects it as a matter of order.

Its present-day form is plain: the most common obstacle to doing a thing one knows to be right is not believing that the thing is wrong; it is being wary of how it will be received. The verse does not pretend this wariness away — it only says which wariness has priority.


33/38-39

مَّا كَانَ عَلَى ٱلنَّبِىِّ مِنْ حَرَجٍ فِيمَا فَرَضَ ٱللَّهُ لَهُۥ سُنَّةَ ٱللَّهِ فِى ٱلَّذِينَ خَلَوْا۟ مِن قَبْلُ وَكَانَ أَمْرُ ٱللَّهِ قَدَرًا مَّقْدُورًا · ٱلَّذِينَ يُبَلِّغُونَ رِسَٰلَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ وَيَخْشَوْنَهُۥ وَلَا يَخْشَوْنَ أَحَدًا إِلَّا ٱللَّهَ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ حَسِيبًا

Mā kāna ʿala'l-nabiyyi min ḥarajin fīmā faraḍa'llāhu lah, sunnata'llāhi fi'lladhīna khalaw min qabl, wa kāna amru'llāhi qadaran maqdūrā · Alladhīna yuballighūna risālāti'llāhi wa yakhshawnahu wa lā yakhshawna aḥadan illa'llāh, wa kafā bi'llāhi ḥasībā

"There is no difficulty for the Prophet in what God has laid down for him. This is God's way with those who passed away before. And God's command is a decree determined. · They are those who deliver the messages of God and are in awe of Him and are in awe of no one but God. And God suffices as a reckoner."

The repetition of the word حَرَج

In the thirty-seventh verse the ground was the removal of a ḥaraj — for the believers. In the thirty-eighth the same word is used of the Prophet.

VerseWhoWhat
37ʿala'l-muʾminīnaThat there be no difficulty regarding the wives of adopted sons
38ʿala'l-nabiyyiNo difficulty in what has been laid down

The same word, on both sides within two verses. The word order shows that the ruling is applied to both sides in the same way.

I record this as my own reading.

فَرَضَ — root ف-ر-ض

The concrete sense of the root must be dwelt on: faraḍa — to cut a thing and make it distinct, to make a notch. Furḍa — a notch, a nick. From this comes the sense "to determine, to appoint, to make obligatory".

That is, farḍ is in its root an act of cutting and marking out — the marking of a thing's limit.

And this agrees with the continuation of the verse: qadaran maqdūrā — a decree determined. Both words carry the sense of "determining".

سُنَّةَ ٱللَّهِ — sunnat Allāh

Root: س-ن-ن. And the concrete sense of the root is to make a thing flow or run smoothly over a surface: sanna'l-māʾ — he made the water flow; sinān — a spearhead (sharpened); misann — a whetstone.

From this comes the sense "a way, a custom, a course that runs on": a road walked over again and again and thereby made distinct.

This concept was treated in detail at al-Fatḥ (48/23), and verse 62 of this sūra was taken into the table there. I rely on that treatment.

The note recorded there and needing repetition here: "The application of the concept of sunnat Allāh to contemporary events was not entered into; it was recorded that the concept is a measure for understanding the past, not an authority for judging the present."

In this sūra sunnat Allāh occurs twice:

VerseContext
38That there be no difficulty in what is laid down for the prophets
62The ruling about those who spread baseless news

And what the two occurrences have in common is worth recording: both come after a regulation. The sūra presents the rulings it brings not as "new" but as the continuation of a course that has always run.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that both occurrences stand in the same position.

فِى ٱلَّذِينَ خَلَوْا۟ مِن قَبْلُخَلَا, root خ-ل-و: to be empty, to pass away. And the same expression occurred at al-Baqara 2/214: alladhīna khalaw min qablikum — "those who passed away before you."

In both verses the same expression with the same function: a reference to a pattern in the past.

قَدَرًا مَّقْدُورًا — a measure

Root: ق-د-ر. And the primary sense of the root is to measure, to determine the quantity of. It was treated as the name of a sūra at al-Qadr.

And the construction is a reinforcement of the cognate-accusative kind: qadaran maqdūrā — "a determined determination". Two words from the same root.

The Qurʾān uses such repetitions of a root for emphasis and it has already been seen five times in this sūra (11, 23, 33, 36, and here).

ٱلَّذِينَ يُبَلِّغُونَ رِسَٰلَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ — the description of the prophets

بَلَّغَ — root ب-ل-غ. To reach, to arrive; in Form II, "to make reach". And this root occurred in the tenth verse too: balaghati'l-qulūbu'l-ḥanājir — "the hearts reached the throats".

The same root, once the place fear reaches, once the delivering of a message. I record it.

رِسَٰلَٰت — plural. The plural of risāla. That it comes in the plural is worth noting: not a single message but messages.

وَلَا يَخْشَوْنَ أَحَدًا إِلَّا ٱللَّهَ — the answer to the thirty-seventh verse

This sentence is the direct counterpart of the expression takhsha'l-nās in the thirty-seventh verse.

VerseExpressionWhat
37wa takhsha'l-nāsaBeing wary of people (corrected)
37wa'llāhu aḥaqqu an takhshāhThe one who should be feared
39wa lā yakhshawna aḥadan illa'llāhThe description of the prophets

Three expressions, within two verses, from the same root (خ-ش-ي). And the order describes a movement: a correction, a measure, a description.

That is, the thirty-ninth verse sets down what is corrected in the thirty-seventh as the general attribute of the prophets. I record it as my own reading.

And the word aḥad occurs in the sūra for the second time after the thirty-second verse — there ka-aḥadin mina'l-nisāʾ, here aḥadan illa'llāh. As was recorded at al-Ikhlāṣ, in a negative context the word means "no one at all", and that is exactly its sense here.

وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ حَسِيبًا — the verse-ending

The pattern كَفَىٰ بِـ for the third time in this sūra (3, 25, 39).

حَسِيب — root ح-س-ب. To count, to reckon. It occurred in the twentieth verse as yaḥsabūna — there a mistaken reckoning, here the one who takes the reckoning.

The same root, once a person's erring count, once the one who sees the reckoning rightly. I record it.


33/40

مَّا كَانَ مُحَمَّدٌ أَبَآ أَحَدٍ مِّن رِّجَالِكُمْ وَلَٰكِن رَّسُولَ ٱللَّهِ وَخَاتَمَ ٱلنَّبِيِّـۧنَ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمًا

Mā kāna Muḥammadun abā aḥadin min rijālikum wa lākin rasūla'llāhi wa khātama'l-nabiyyīn, wa kāna'llāhu bi-kulli shayʾin ʿalīmā

"Muhammad is not the father of any of your men; but he is the Messenger of God and the seal of the prophets. God is Knowing of all things."

One of the densest verses of the sūra

This verse does two separate things in the same sentence, and that the two are in the same sentence is no accident:

1. It abolishes a claim of lineage. 2. It states a standing.

And the two are joined by wa lākin (but). That is, the sentence begins with a negation and ends with an affirmation.

مَّا كَانَ مُحَمَّدٌ أَبَآ أَحَدٍ مِّن رِّجَالِكُمْ

The sentence is the direct complement of the fourth verse.

VerseThe sentenceWhat
4mā jaʿala adʿiyāʾakum abnāʾakumThe general ruling: adopted sons are not sons
40mā kāna Muḥammadun abā aḥadin min rijālikumThe same ruling, applied concretely

The fourth verse said "they are not your sons" — from the side of the son. The fortieth says "he is not the father" — from the side of the father. The principle is completed from both ends.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the two sentences take up the same relationship from two directions.

مِّن رِّجَالِكُمْ — "of your men". The word rajul occurs in this sūra for the third time (4, 23, 40).

And that the word is rijāl (grown men) is recorded in classical exegesis: the expression is taken to indicate that the Prophet had no male child who reached adulthood. This is a reading drawn from the wording of the verse and is widespread in classical exegesis; I do not present it as a settled ruling.

The name "Muhammad" occurs in four places in the Qurʾān: Āl ʿImrān 3/144, al-Aḥzāb 33/40, Muḥammad 47/2, al-Fatḥ 48/29. This note was given at al-Masad and at al-Fatḥ.

وَخَاتَمَ ٱلنَّبِيِّـۧنَ — analysis of the root

Root: خ-ت-م. This root was treated in detail at al-Baqara (2/7, khatama'llāhu ʿalā qulūbihim) and this construction was mentioned there too. I rely on that treatment and bring what was recorded there over to here.

What was recorded there:

  • The root: to come to the end of a thing, and to set a seal.
  • From the same root comes khātam — a signet ring; and this is the khātam al-nabiyyīn used of the Prophet.
  • A seal does two things: it closes and it authenticates. When an envelope is sealed it both becomes impossible to enter and is declared to have a settled content.

And now these two functions must be applied to this construction.

The concrete picture of the root: a khātam is the seal pressed on the mouth of a letter. And a seal does two things to a letter: it states that the writing has ended, and it authenticates that the writing is genuine.

What the seal doesIts counterpart in the construction
It closesThe end has been reached
It authenticatesThose before have been confirmed

Both of these aspects are recorded in classical exegesis and they do not exclude one another.

And one detail about the picture of the seal is worth recording: the seal is pressed on the outside of the letter but is not the letter itself. That is, the seal is not a part of the text; it is the sign that the text is complete.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the concrete sense of the root.

The difference of reading: خَاتَم / خَاتِم

There is a difference of variant reading in this word and it must be recorded.

ReadingPatternMeaning
خَاتَم (khātam, with fatḥa on the tāʾ)A noun — in the pattern of an instrument nounSeal — the instrument that seals, a signet ring
خَاتِم (khātim, with kasra on the tāʾ)An active participleSealer — the one who does the sealing

Both readings are found among the readers. The widespread reading is khātam; the reading khātim is also transmitted.

The difference of meaning is fine and is recorded in classical exegesis thus: in the reading khātam the emphasis falls on the instrument (being a seal), in the reading khātim on the act (the sealing).

Both readings come out at the same place and no preference is adopted in this commentary.

ٱلنَّبِيِّـۧن — the prophets

Root: ن-ب-أ. News. Nabī — the one who brings news; or, on one view, from the root ن-ب-و, "the one who is high".

And that the construction uses the word nabī and not rasūl is worth noting. The verse uses both words in the same sentence: rasūla'llāhi and khātama'l-nabiyyīn.

The difference between the two words has been debated in classical exegesis and no conclusion has been reached. One of the most widespread explanations is this: nubuwwa is a wider and risāla a narrower concept — every messenger is a prophet, not every prophet a messenger. This explanation is disputed and no ruling is issued in this commentary.

But the datum the word order gives is this: the verse ties the note of the seal to the concept said to be the wider one. This is an observation.

On the extent of the construction

What this construction means is a matter of theology in Islamic thought and goes beyond the limits of this commentary.

What emerges from the wording of the text is this: Muhammad is the seal of the prophets. And in its root the seal carries both the sense of an end and the sense of authentication.

Different interpretations have been put forward on this through history, and they have been a subject of division among schools and movements. This commentary does not enter that debate and makes no insinuation against any group.

Per the note in Method: the disagreement is not concealed, but no polemic is entered. The existence of the disagreement is recorded here; its content and its parties are not the subject of this commentary.

The place of the verse in the sūra — the closing of the ring

And now the most striking structural fact of the sūra.

In the fourth verse the sūra laid down a principle: a name does not change reality. And it gave three examples: two hearts, ẓihār, the adopted son.

The fortieth verse closes the third of those three examples — and in closing it uses the same structure:

33/433/40
The patternmā jaʿala…mā kāna…
What is deniedThat an adopted son is a son by birthThat a particular person is a father
What followsdhālikum qawlukum bi-afwāhikumwa lākin rasūla'llāhi wa khātama'l-nabiyyīn

And the difference is worth recording: in the fourth verse a diagnosis follows the denial (this is your saying). In the fortieth a standing follows the denial.

That is, the sūra leaves no gap in place of the ascription it removes. A father's ascription is removed and two standings are put in its place: messengership and the seal.

And this is what the sūra has been doing from the beginning: in the fifth verse lineage was removed and brotherhood and being a mawlā were put in its place; in the sixth precedence in inheritance was regulated and the door of kindness was opened in its place; in the fortieth fatherhood is removed and messengership put in its place.

In removing one bond the sūra always establishes another. I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the same structure in the three verses.

What this says to the present

The measure of the verse is what determines who a person is.

The sentence proposes two definitions and rejects one: fatherhood (definition through lineage) is rejected, messengership (definition through an office) is set in its place.

And it agrees with the sūra as a whole: since the fourth verse the sūra has been dealing with false identities built on lineage and ascription. The fortieth verse applies the same measure to its own prophet.

I record this as my own reading. And I enter one further note: that a text applies its own measure to its own founder may be counted a datum about the seriousness of that measure. This is not a proof but an observation — it was given at ʿAbasa with the same note of caution.


33/41-44

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ ذِكْرًا كَثِيرًا · وَسَبِّحُوهُ بُكْرَةً وَأَصِيلًا · هُوَ ٱلَّذِى يُصَلِّى عَلَيْكُمْ وَمَلَٰٓئِكَتُهُۥ لِيُخْرِجَكُم مِّنَ ٱلظُّلُمَٰتِ إِلَى ٱلنُّورِ وَكَانَ بِٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ رَحِيمًا · تَحِيَّتُهُمْ يَوْمَ يَلْقَوْنَهُۥ سَلَٰمٌ وَأَعَدَّ لَهُمْ أَجْرًا كَرِيمًا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanu'dhkuru'llāha dhikran kathīrā · Wa sabbiḥūhu bukratan wa aṣīlā · Huwa'lladhī yuṣallī ʿalaykum wa malāʾikatuhu li-yukhrijakum mina'l-ẓulumāti ila'l-nūr, wa kāna bi'l-muʾminīna raḥīmā · Taḥiyyatuhum yawma yalqawnahu salām, wa aʿadda lahum ajran karīmā

"O you who believe! Remember God much. · And glorify Him morning and evening. · It is He who sends ṣalāt upon you — and His angels — to bring you out of the darknesses into the light. He is Merciful to the believers. · Their greeting on the day they meet Him is 'peace'; and He has prepared for them a noble reward."

The function of the block

The Zayd section is over. Here the sūra takes a breath.

The verses from forty-one to forty-eight are the gentlest part of the sūra, and they give not a regulation but a direction.

And this is a fact in the structure of the sūra that must be recorded: between and after the two heaviest sections (the siege and Zayd) a verse of remembrance or of exemplarity has always been placed.

BlockWhat follows
The siege (9-20)Uswa ḥasana (21)
The household and the general principle (28-35)
Zayd (36-40)The block of remembrance (41-48)

I record this as my own reading.

ٱذْكُرُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ ذِكْرًا كَثِيرًا

The condition of the twenty-first verse turns here into a command.

VerseExpressionMood
21wa dhakara'llāha kathīrāA condition — for the exemplarity to work
41udhkuru'llāha dhikran kathīrāA command — reinforced with a cognate accusative

And it occurred in the thirty-fifth verse too as an attribute: al-dhākirīna'llāha kathīran wa'l-dhākirāt.

That is, the sūra says the same thing three times in three different moods: condition, attribute, command. I record it.

ذِكْرًا كَثِيرًا — again a cognate accusative. The sixth reinforcement in the sūra.

And that the Qurʾān enters a note of "much" for remembrance is striking. The Qurʾān generally sets no quantity to acts of worship; here there is a note of quantity. And the measure is "much" — not a particular number.

This is worth recording: the note is quantitative but not numerical. That is, it conveys not a lower limit but an orientation.

وَسَبِّحُوهُ بُكْرَةً وَأَصِيلًا

سَبَّحَ — root س-ب-ح. And the concrete sense of the root is to swim: sabaḥa fi'l-māʾ — he swam in the water. The Qurʾān uses the root of the heavenly bodies too: "Each swims in an orbit" (al-Anbiyāʾ 21/33yasbaḥūn).

The lexicographers dwell on how the root passes from "to swim" to "to declare free of imperfection": tasbīḥ is to remove a thing from what does not befit it — as the swimmer passes through the water and moves away.

بُكْرَة وَأَصِيل — morning and evening. This pair was recorded at al-Fatḥ and this verse was given there as an example: "The Qurʾān uses the same pair in several places: 'Glorify Him morning and evening' (al-Aḥzāb 33/42)." I rely on that treatment.

أَصِيل — root أ-ص-ل. Aṣl — a root, a foundation. Aṣīl — the end of the day, the time from the afternoon to the evening. The lexicographers do not establish with certainty the link between the "root" sense of the word and the sense "end of day"; I record it but build no meaning on it.

هُوَ ٱلَّذِى يُصَلِّى عَلَيْكُمْ وَمَلَٰٓئِكَتُهُۥ

This sentence is the herald of the fifty-sixth verse, and the analysis of the root ص-ل-و will be made there.

But a fact of word order must be recorded here.

VerseWhoTo whom
33/43God and His angelsTo the believers
33/56God and His angelsTo the Prophet

The same structure, in the same sūra, with two different recipients. And the forty-third verse comes before the fifty-sixth.

This is an order worth recording: the sūra first states the ṣalāt made upon the believers, then the one made upon the Prophet. I record this as my own reading.

لِيُخْرِجَكُم مِّنَ ٱلظُّلُمَٰتِ إِلَى ٱلنُّورِ — the ground

The construction is a recurring pattern in the Qurʾān (al-Baqara 2/257; Ibrāhīm 14/1; al-Ḥadīd 57/9treated at al-Ḥadīd; al-Ṭalāq 65/11).

And the pattern has an invariable feature, worth recording: ẓulumāt is always plural and nūr always singular.

In classical exegesis this is tied to the manyness of darkness and the oneness of light: there are many ways of leaving the road, and the right road has a single direction.

I record this explanation; I do not present it as a settled ruling — but the fact (the plural/singular contrast) is consistent in the Qurʾān and is a countable datum.

تَحِيَّتُهُمْ يَوْمَ يَلْقَوْنَهُۥ سَلَٰمٌ

تَحِيَّة — root ح-ي-ي. And the primary sense of the root is life. Taḥiyya is originally a greeting meaning "I wish you life, long life".

That is, in the root of the word there is a wish — the good wish said on meeting.

سَلَٰم — root س-ل-م. For the third time in this sūra (in 22 as taslīm, in 35 as muslimīn, here as salām).

And the concrete sense of the root — wholeness, completeness — is at work in all three occurrences:

VerseWordWhat
22taslīmāLeaving oneself wholly
35al-muslimīna wa'l-muslimātThose who submit
44salāmThe greeting

The sūra opens the root as a state and closes it as a recompense. I record this as my own reading.

أَجْرًا كَرِيمًا — in the thirty-first verse rizqan karīmā occurred; here ajran karīmā. The same adjective with two different nouns.


33/45-48

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّبِىُّ إِنَّآ أَرْسَلْنَٰكَ شَٰهِدًا وَمُبَشِّرًا وَنَذِيرًا · وَدَاعِيًا إِلَى ٱللَّهِ بِإِذْنِهِۦ وَسِرَاجًا مُّنِيرًا · وَبَشِّرِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ بِأَنَّ لَهُم مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ فَضْلًا كَبِيرًا · وَلَا تُطِعِ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ وَٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ وَدَعْ أَذَىٰهُمْ وَتَوَكَّلْ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ وَكَفَىٰ بِٱللَّهِ وَكِيلًا

Yā ayyuha'l-nabiyyu innā arsalnāka shāhidan wa mubashshiran wa nadhīrā · Wa dāʿiyan ila'llāhi bi-idhnihī wa sirājan munīrā · Wa bashshiri'l-muʾminīna bi-anna lahum mina'llāhi faḍlan kabīrā · Wa lā tuṭiʿi'l-kāfirīna wa'l-munāfiqīna wa daʿ adhāhum wa tawakkal ʿala'llāh, wa kafā bi'llāhi wakīlā

"O Prophet! We have sent you as a witness, a bringer of good news and a warner; · and as one calling to God by His leave, and as an illuminating lamp. · Give the believers the good news that they have a great bounty from God. · And do not obey the disbelievers and the hypocrites; pay no heed to their injury; and rely on God. God suffices as a trustee."

The closing of the ring

These four verses close a ring with the first three verses of the sūra, and the ring is almost exact.

33/1-333/45-48
The addressyā ayyuha'l-nabiyyyā ayyuha'l-nabiyy
The prohibitionlā tuṭiʿi'l-kāfirīna wa'l-munāfiqīnlā tuṭiʿi'l-kāfirīna wa'l-munāfiqīn
The commandtawakkal ʿala'llāhtawakkal ʿala'llāh
The verse-endingwa kafā bi'llāhi wakīlāwa kafā bi'llāhi wakīlā

The same verse-ending, the same prohibition, the same command.

And there are two differences, both worth recording:

One. In the forty-eighth verse there is an addition: wa daʿ adhāhum — "pay no heed to their injury". It was not there at the head of the sūra.

Two. In the forty-fifth and forty-sixth verses five attributes are enumerated. They were not enumerated at the head of the sūra.

That is, the sūra returns to the same frame but has added two things inside it: a definition and a note of endurance. And what happened in the forty verses between required exactly this: a siege, an internal separation, a heavy regulation.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the verbal overlap of the two blocks and their differences.

Five attributes

This verse was already mentioned at al-Fatḥ: "O Prophet! We have sent you as a witness, a bringer of good news and a warner… (al-Aḥzāb 33/45-46). The same three words, in the same order; there two further attributes are added." I rely on that treatment.

#AttributeRootWhat
1شَاهِدش-ه-دA witness — one who sees and states what he has seen
2مُبَشِّرب-ش-رOne who brings good news
3نَذِيرن-ذ-رOne who warns
4دَاعِيًا إِلَى ٱللَّهِد-ع-وOne who calls
5سِرَاجًا مُّنِيرًاس-ر-جAn illuminating lamp

The root ب-ش-ر: bashara — skin, the surface of the body. Bushrā — good news; and the link is this: the skin of the face of a person who receives good news changes. That is, good news is in the root of the word a change of countenance.

The root ن-ذ-ر: nadhr — a vow; and indhār — warning. The lexicographers join the two on the common ground of "binding oneself to a thing / making someone aware of a thing".

The root د-ع-و — for the fourth time in this sūra. It occurred in the fourth and fifth verses as adʿiyāʾ and udʿūhum.

And this repetition is worth recording: the same root was, at the head of the sūra, the name of a false ascription (adʿiyāʾ — adopted sons), and here it is the name of a true call (dāʿiyan ila'llāh).

The root is "to call"; and the sūra corrects the direction of the call twice: call the child by his father (5), call people to God (46).

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the four occurrences of the root in the sūra.

سِرَاجًا مُّنِيرًا — a lamp

Root: س-ر-ج. A lamp, a thing that gives light.

This word was treated at Nūḥ and the finding recorded there is worth bringing over: "the Qurʾān uses the word sirāj of the Prophet as well — 'an illuminating lamp' (sirājan munīrā, al-Aḥzāb 33/46). There, of course, no burning body is meant. The word conveys not a physical mechanism but the function of being a source."

The Qurʾān uses the word of the sun too (Nūḥ 71/16; al-Furqān 25/61; al-Nabaʾ 78/13 — there sirājan wahhājā).

And a difference is worth recording: for the sun the adjective wahhāj (scorching, fierce) is used, for the Prophet munīr (illuminating).

I give this difference as an observation; I build no forced meaning upon it.

وَدَعْ أَذَىٰهُمْ — "pay no heed to their injury"

The sūra's axis of injury begins here.

The root أ-ذ-ي: to disturb, to hurt. The distinction the lexicographers record is important: adhā is not a great harm; it is a light but continual annoyance. Less than ḍarar, but more wearing.

The Qurʾān uses the root in this sense: "They can do you no harm beyond an injury" (Āl ʿImrān 3/111lan yaḍurrūkum illā adhā). The verse plainly distinguishes adhā from ḍarar.

And the root occurs seven times in this sūra (48, 53 twice, 57, 58, 59, 69). This is one of the densest uses within a single sūra in the Qurʾān.

دَعْ — root و-د-ع. To leave, to abandon. Daʿ — leave it.

And the form of the command is worth recording: the verse does not say "do not answer them" or "be patient". It says "leave it".

The difference is this: patience is carrying something. To leave is not to carry it. The verse commands the second.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the choice of the verb.

What this says to the present

The two commands of the forty-eighth verse together describe an attitude: not falling into line, and paying no heed.

And the relationship between the two is worth recording. The most common price a person pays for not falling into line with a group is the continual small annoyances that come from that group — adhā. And these annoyances, taken one by one, are trivial; their sum is a pressure.

The verse's solution is not to answer back: daʿ — leave it. That is, the verse asks in the same sentence both for not falling into line and for not reacting.

And for this to be possible a third command comes: tawakkal ʿala'llāh. As at the head of the sūra, the note of leaving the outcome is what makes the attitude bearable.


33/49

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوٓا۟ إِذَا نَكَحْتُمُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ ثُمَّ طَلَّقْتُمُوهُنَّ مِن قَبْلِ أَن تَمَسُّوهُنَّ فَمَا لَكُمْ عَلَيْهِنَّ مِنْ عِدَّةٍ تَعْتَدُّونَهَا فَمَتِّعُوهُنَّ وَسَرِّحُوهُنَّ سَرَاحًا جَمِيلًا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū idhā nakaḥtumu'l-muʾmināti thumma ṭallaqtumūhunna min qabli an tamassūhunna fa-mā lakum ʿalayhinna min ʿiddatin taʿtaddūnahā, fa-mattiʿūhunna wa sarriḥūhunna sarāḥan jamīlā

"O you who believe! If you marry believing women and then divorce them before you have touched them, you have upon them no waiting period to count. So give them a provision and release them in a fair release."

A regulation and a repetition

The verse states a ruling and closes the ruling with a command.

And the closing command is word for word the same as in the twenty-eighth verse: sarāḥan jamīlā.

VerseWhoThe construction
28The choice offered to the Prophet's wivesusarriḥkunna sarāḥan jamīlā
49A command to all the believerssarriḥūhunna sarāḥan jamīlā

The same construction, once an offer and once a command. And there are twenty-one verses between them.

This is a method of the sūra and I record it: a measure applied in a particular case is afterwards repeated as a general command. The sūra opens to everyone the measure established in the Prophet's house.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the exact repetition of the construction.

عِدَّة — root ع-د-د

To count. ʿAdad — a number; ʿidda — a counted period.

And in the root of the word there is an act of counting — indeed the verse adds the verb as well: taʿtaddūnahā — "which you would count". Two words from the same root.

What the institution of the ʿidda is, and how long it lasts in which cases, is the business of jurisprudence and is not taken up in this commentary. The subject was touched on at al-Ṭalāq; I leave it there.

What emerges from the wording of the verse is this: in a particular case (a marriage contracted and ended before it has actually begun) there is no waiting period.

And the ground of the ruling is visible in the logic of the institution: one of the functions of the ʿidda is that lineage should not be confused; where that possibility does not exist, no period is needed either. This is an observation, not a legal ruling.

فَمَتِّعُوهُنَّ — a provision

The root م-ت-ع for the third time in this sūra (16, 28, 49).

And the structure of the ruling is worth recording: the verse first removes an obligation (there is no ʿidda), then lays down an obligation (give a provision and release them in a fair release).

That is, in bringing an easing the verse does not dump the cost of the easing on the other side. The period is lifted, but the provision and the manner remain.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the order of the verse's two clauses.

What this says to the present

The measure of the verse is that short relationships too have an ending.

However short a bond may be, its ending has a form. And the verse does not count the shortness of the period as a ground: it does not say "it had not begun anyway".

On the contrary, it asks for two things: a provision and a form. That is, the duration of a relationship and the responsibility in its ending are not the same thing.


33/50

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّبِىُّ إِنَّآ أَحْلَلْنَا لَكَ أَزْوَٰجَكَ ٱلَّٰتِىٓ ءَاتَيْتَ أُجُورَهُنَّ … خَالِصَةً لَّكَ مِن دُونِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ قَدْ عَلِمْنَا مَا فَرَضْنَا عَلَيْهِمْ فِىٓ أَزْوَٰجِهِمْ وَمَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُهُمْ لِكَيْلَا يَكُونَ عَلَيْكَ حَرَجٌ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا

Yā ayyuha'l-nabiyyu innā aḥlalnā laka azwājaka'llātī ātayta ujūrahunna… khāliṣatan laka min dūni'l-muʾminīn, qad ʿalimnā mā faraḍnā ʿalayhim fī azwājihim wa mā malakat aymānuhum li-kaylā yakūna ʿalayka ḥaraj, wa kāna'llāhu ghafūran raḥīmā

"O Prophet! We have made lawful for you your wives whose bridal gifts you have given … This is yours alone, apart from the believers. We know what We have laid down for them concerning their wives and those their right hands possess — so that there should be no difficulty for you. God is Forgiving, Merciful."

Note: the full text of the verse is long; its beginning and its end are given here, and the enumeration in the middle is treated below.

The structure of the verse

The verse states a regulation particular to the Prophet and says so explicitly: khāliṣatan laka min dūni'l-muʾminīn — "as yours alone, apart from the believers."

This note is the most important sentence of the verse and must be recorded at the outset: the regulation the verse brings is not a general ruling, and the verse itself states this.

خَالِصَة — root خ-ل-ص. Pure, unmixed, belonging to one thing alone. Ikhlāṣ is from the same root (treated as the name of a sūra at al-Ikhlāṣ). In the root of the word there is a sifting out: what has been cleared of any admixture.

The categories enumerated

In its middle part the verse makes an enumeration. The categories in brief:

#Category
1Wives whose bridal gifts have been given
2Those in his possession
3Of the daughters of paternal and maternal uncles and aunts, those who emigrated with him
4A believing woman who gives herself to the Prophet — if the Prophet accepts

For the fourth category the verse enters a further note: khāliṣatan laka min dūni'l-muʾminīn.

To which category this note belongs has been debated in classical exegesis:

ViewWhat it says
It belongs to the fourth category aloneThe note attaches to the clause immediately before it
It belongs to the whole enumerationThe note qualifies the entire regulation

I do not impose a preference. The word order, in that the note comes immediately after the fourth category, seems to support the first view; this is an observation.

A note on وَمَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُهُمْ

This expression names an institution that existed in the social order of that period (slavery).

No legal ruling is issued on this in this commentary and how the subject has been debated through history is not entered into. But for the text to be readable two notes must be entered:

One. The Qurʾān names this institution as an existing reality and brings regulations. The same Qurʾān, in many places, sets the freeing of slaves forward as a good deed and an expiation: "the freeing of a neck from its yoke" (al-Balad 90/13treated at al-Balad); the expiation of an oath (al-Māʾida 5/89); the expiation of ẓihār (al-Mujādala 58/3treated at al-Mujādala); and, as one of the categories to which alms are directed, fi'l-riqāb (al-Tawba 9/60).

Two. What conclusion is to be drawn as a whole from the verses in which this expression occurs is a question long debated in the history of Islamic thought and goes beyond the limits of this commentary. What is done here is to record, without concealment, the existence of the expression and the Qurʾān's other notes on the same subject.

Per the method (Method): no legal ruling is issued, no preference is imposed, and current debates are not entered.

لِكَيْلَا يَكُونَ عَلَيْكَ حَرَجٌ — the ground

And the clause of ground in the verse has the same structure as that of the thirty-seventh.

VerseThe groundFor whom
37li-kay lā yakūna ʿala'l-muʾminīna ḥarajThe believers
38mā kāna ʿala'l-nabiyyi min ḥarajThe Prophet
50li-kaylā yakūna ʿalayka ḥarajThe Prophet

In all three verses the same word (ḥaraj) and the same function: the removal of a constriction.

And the picture in the root of the word — a dense thicket that gives no passage — is the same in all three: the opening of a way.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the repetition of the word in the three verses.


33/51

تُرْجِى مَن تَشَآءُ مِنْهُنَّ وَتُـْٔوِىٓ إِلَيْكَ مَن تَشَآءُ وَمَنِ ٱبْتَغَيْتَ مِمَّنْ عَزَلْتَ فَلَا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْكَ ذَٰلِكَ أَدْنَىٰٓ أَن تَقَرَّ أَعْيُنُهُنَّ وَلَا يَحْزَنَّ وَيَرْضَيْنَ بِمَآ ءَاتَيْتَهُنَّ كُلُّهُنَّ وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ مَا فِى قُلُوبِكُمْ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلِيمًا حَلِيمًا

Turjī man tashāʾu minhunna wa tuʾwī ilayka man tashāʾ, wa mani'btaghayta mimman ʿazalta fa-lā junāḥa ʿalayk, dhālika adnā an taqarra aʿyunuhunna wa lā yaḥzanna wa yarḍayna bimā ātaytahunna kulluhunna, wa'llāhu yaʿlamu mā fī qulūbikum, wa kāna'llāhu ʿalīman ḥalīmā

"You may put off whom you will of them and take to yourself whom you will. And if you seek one of those you have set aside, there is no blame on you. That is more likely to bring comfort to their eyes, that they should not grieve, and that all of them should be content with what you give them. God knows what is in your hearts. God is Knowing, Forbearing."

The words

تُرْجِى — root ر-ج-و or ر-ج-أ. To postpone, to put off. The same root occurred in the twenty-first verse as yarjū (to hope), and it was recorded there: under the root lie both "to hope" and "to postpone".

And the comparison of the two occurrences is worth noting: in 21 hope, here postponement. The same root, once looking forward in time, once casting a thing forward in time.

تُـْٔوِى — root أ-و-ي. To shelter, to give refuge. Maʾwā — a place of refuge.

عَزَلْتَ — root ع-ز-ل. To separate, to set aside. ʿUzla is from the same root.

ذَٰلِكَ أَدْنَىٰٓ — the pattern of the ground

أَدْنَىٰ — root د-ن-و. To be near; the elative: "nearer, more fitting".

And this pattern occurs twice in the sūra:

VerseThe constructionThe ground
51dhālika adnā an taqarra aʿyunuhunna wa lā yaḥzanna wa yarḍaynaEase of heart
59dhālika adnā an yuʿrafna fa-lā yuʾdhaynaBeing recognised and not injured

Both verses bring a regulation and give its ground with the pattern adnā.

And this is a fact that must be recorded: in these two places the Qurʾān writes explicitly why the ruling has been laid down. And both grounds look to people's inward condition: in one, ease of heart; in the other, not being injured.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the use of the pattern with the same function in both verses.

And another feature of the adnā pattern: it is an elative, that is, it says "more" and not "most". It conveys not a definite best but an orientation — like aqsaṭ in the fifth verse.

أَن تَقَرَّ أَعْيُنُهُنَّ — an idiom

The root ق-ر-ر. It occurred in the thirty-third verse in the reading qarna: to be fixed, to come to rest.

Qurratu ʿayn — "the settling of the eye". It is an idiom in Arabic and means joy, calm, contentment.

And the picture in the idiom comes from the root: the eye, when it is uneasy, roams and cannot stay still — this was described exactly in the tenth and nineteenth verses (zāghati'l-abṣār, tadūru aʿyunuhum). The eye's "settling" is the sign of calm.

And this sets up a web within the sūra:

VerseThe eyeThe state
10zāghati'l-abṣārFear — a swerving gaze
19tadūru aʿyunuhumFear — a rolling gaze
51taqarra aʿyunuhunnaCalm — a settled gaze

The sūra records three states of the eye, and all three are indicators of the inward condition. I record this as my own reading.

وَٱللَّهُ يَعْلَمُ مَا فِى قُلُوبِكُمْ

And again the heart. The places where the word occurs in the sūra: 4, 10, 12, 26, 32, 51, 53.

And this occurrence is worth noting: the pronoun is masculine plural (qulūbikum) — that is, the address is not to the women alone but to everyone.

The function of the sentence: a regulation is being made, and whether the regulation works is measured not from outside but from the heart. The measure of the fifth verse (mā taʿammadat qulūbukum) is repeated here.

حَلِيم — the verse-ending

Root: ح-ل-م. Not to be hasty, not to be angered, to act with weight. Ḥilm — patient maturity.

And the agreement of the verse-ending with the verse: the verse takes as its subject a regulation and the feelings that regulation may arouse in people. And the name ḥalīm carries the sense "He knows but does not hasten".


33/52

لَّا يَحِلُّ لَكَ ٱلنِّسَآءُ مِنۢ بَعْدُ وَلَآ أَن تَبَدَّلَ بِهِنَّ مِنْ أَزْوَٰجٍ وَلَوْ أَعْجَبَكَ حُسْنُهُنَّ إِلَّا مَا مَلَكَتْ يَمِينُكَ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ رَّقِيبًا

Lā yaḥillu laka'l-nisāʾu min baʿdu wa lā an tabaddala bihinna min azwājin wa law aʿjabaka ḥusnuhunna illā mā malakat yamīnuk, wa kāna'llāhu ʿalā kulli shayʾin raqībā

"Women are not lawful for you after this, nor that you should exchange your wives for others — even though their beauty please you. Except those your right hand possesses. God is Watchful over all things."

A verse of limit

The fiftieth verse had stated a widening; the fifty-second sets a limit.

And that the two verses come one after the other is worth recording: two verses after bringing a regulation, the sūra draws a limit around that regulation.

I record this as a datum of the text.

تَبَدَّلَ — root ب-د-ل

To change, to put another in the place of a thing. And this root occurred in the twenty-third verse: mā baddalū tabdīlā — "they made no change at all."

The same root, once the not changing of a word, once the not changing of a spouse. I record it.

وَلَوْ أَعْجَبَكَ حُسْنُهُنَّ — the plainness of the note

أَعْجَبَ — root ع-ج-ب. To astonish, to please. ʿAjīb — astonishing; iʿjāb — admiration, being taken with something.

And the placing of this note in the verse is striking.

The verse could have laid down the prohibition and passed on. Instead it also writes in what circumstance the prohibition will become hard: wa law aʿjabaka ḥusnuhunna.

This is a recurring feature in the Qurʾān's way of framing a prohibition, and I record it: the prohibition is laid down while showing awareness of the human inclination. That is, the verse does not tell the one addressed "this is easy for you".

I give this as my own reading; its ground is the presence of the law clause.

رَقِيب — the verse-ending

Root: ر-ق-ب. And the concrete sense of the root is the neck: raqaba — a neck. Raqīb — the watcher; and the link is this: the one who watches stretches out his neck to look.

From the same root come murāqaba (observation) and irtiqāb.

And the agreement of the verse-ending with the verse: the verse sets a limit, and the verse-ending states that the limit is watched. The picture in the root of the word supports this too: one who looks from a distance, stretching out his neck.


33/53

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَدْخُلُوا۟ بُيُوتَ ٱلنَّبِىِّ إِلَّآ أَن يُؤْذَنَ لَكُمْ إِلَىٰ طَعَامٍ غَيْرَ نَٰظِرِينَ إِنَىٰهُ وَلَٰكِنْ إِذَا دُعِيتُمْ فَٱدْخُلُوا۟ فَإِذَا طَعِمْتُمْ فَٱنتَشِرُوا۟ وَلَا مُسْتَـْٔنِسِينَ لِحَدِيثٍ إِنَّ ذَٰلِكُمْ كَانَ يُؤْذِى ٱلنَّبِىَّ فَيَسْتَحْىِۦ مِنكُمْ وَٱللَّهُ لَا يَسْتَحْىِۦ مِنَ ٱلْحَقِّ وَإِذَا سَأَلْتُمُوهُنَّ مَتَٰعًا فَسْـَٔلُوهُنَّ مِن وَرَآءِ حِجَابٍ ذَٰلِكُمْ أَطْهَرُ لِقُلُوبِكُمْ وَقُلُوبِهِنَّ

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lā tadkhulū buyūta'l-nabiyyi illā an yuʾdhana lakum ilā ṭaʿāmin ghayra nāẓirīna ināhu wa lākin idhā duʿītum fa'dkhulū fa-idhā ṭaʿimtum fa'ntashirū wa lā mustaʾnisīna li-ḥadīth, inna dhālikum kāna yuʾdhi'l-nabiyya fa-yastaḥyī minkum wa'llāhu lā yastaḥyī mina'l-ḥaqq, wa idhā saʾaltumūhunna matāʿan fa's'alūhunna min warāʾi ḥijāb, dhālikum aṭharu li-qulūbikum wa qulūbihinn…

"O you who believe! Do not enter the houses of the Prophet unless you are invited to a meal, and without watching for its time. But when you are invited, enter; and when you have eaten, disperse — do not linger over talk. That was disturbing the Prophet, and he was too shy to tell you; but God is not shy of the truth. And when you ask them for something, ask them from behind a screen. That is purer for your hearts and for theirs…"

The continuation of the verse: "And it is not for you to injure the Messenger of God, nor ever to marry his wives after him. That would be a grave thing in God's sight."

The most detailed verse of conduct in the sūra

This verse is one of the longest in the Qurʾān and contains more than one regulation. In order:

1. Not entering without leave. 2. Not watching for the time of the meal. 3. Entering when invited. 4. Dispersing after the meal. 5. Not lingering over talk. 6. Asking for a thing from behind a screen. 7. Not injuring the Prophet. 8. Not marrying his wives after him.

The link with al-Ḥujurāt

At al-Ḥujurāt 49/4-5 the ḥujurāt and the physical boundary of privacy were treated. It is essential to rely on that treatment, because the two verses are two stages of the same matter.

What was recorded there:

  • What is meant are the rooms that made up the Prophet's house, and the word's coming in the plural describes a structure: a series of enclosed spaces adjoining the mosque but separate from it, beside the public area but not part of it.
  • What was censured was not entering but calling out. "A physical boundary can be crossed by voice. A door may be shut and the person may still disturb the one inside. Privacy is not kept safe by a wall alone; it is kept safe by the wall being respected."
  • Ḥujra and ḥijr (reason) are from the same root — both are a boundary.

And now the two verses must be compared.

al-Ḥujurāt 49/4al-Aḥzāb 33/53
The actyunādūnaka — calling outlā tadkhulū — entering
The boundarymin warāʾi'l-ḥujurāt — from behind the roomsmin warāʾi ḥijāb — from behind the screen
What is censuredCrossing the boundary by voiceCrossing the boundary bodily, and staying too long
The diagnosisaktharuhum lā yaʿqilūnkāna yuʾdhi'l-nabiyy
The remedyTo waitLeave, invitation, and dispersal

In both verses the same construction is used: min warāʾi — "from behind". In one, behind the rooms; in the other, behind the screen.

And the difference is worth recording, and I give it as my own reading: in al-Ḥujurāt min warāʾi indicated the place of the violation (those "who call out from behind the rooms" were censured). In al-Aḥzāb the same construction indicates the place of right conduct ("ask from behind the screen").

That is, the same particle in two verses with two opposite functions: in one the place where the boundary is crossed, in the other the place where it is kept.

غَيْرَ نَٰظِرِينَ إِنَىٰهُ — watching for the time

إِنًى — root أ-ن-ي. The time of a thing's ripening, its coming to readiness. Ānī — come to its point. The Qurʾān uses the root of hot water: "from a boiling spring" (al-Ghāshiya 88/5āniya).

The construction occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

And the behaviour described is extremely concrete: sitting there waiting for the food to be cooked. That is, the verse depicts a violation of a boundary as a matter of timing.

This is an observation worth recording: the violation is not in entering; it is in fixing the moment of entry oneself. The same measure was laid down at al-Ḥujurāt 49/5: "Had they been patient until you came out…" — there too the matter was who fixes the length of the waiting.

And the finding recorded at al-Ḥujurāt works here exactly: "The boundary is set not where the person's patience runs out but where the other party is ready."

فَإِذَا طَعِمْتُمْ فَٱنتَشِرُوا۟ — the command to disperse

ٱنتَشَرَ — root ن-ش-ر. To spread, to scatter, to open out. Nashr — spreading; muntashir — scattered.

And the choice of the verb is worth recording: the verse does not say "go out" (ukhrujū), it says "disperse". The verb describes the breaking up of a gathering — not individual departure.

The same verb occurs in Sūrat al-Jumuʿa too: "When the prayer has been performed, disperse through the land" (al-Jumuʿa 62/10treated at al-Jumuʿa). In both places the same structure: a command to disperse after a gathering.

وَلَا مُسْتَـْٔنِسِينَ لِحَدِيثٍ — a fine social observation

This is the most striking expression in the verse and deserves to be dwelt on.

Root: أ-ن-س. And the semantic field of the root is warm: uns — closeness, cohesion, the ease felt in being together. Insān is counted from the same root (according to some lexicographers). Anīs — a friend, one who relieves loneliness. Istiʾnās — to take pleasure in someone, to warm to him, to enjoy spending time with him.

The Qurʾān uses the root in the account of Moses: "I saw / I sensed a fire" (Ṭāhā 20/10ānastu nāran) — there ānasa means noticing something from afar and turning towards it.

حَدِيث — root ح-د-ث. What is new; and from this "speech, conversation" — the new thing that is said.

Now let us look at what the construction describes: mustaʾnisīna li-ḥadīthtaking pleasure in the conversation and staying on there.

And this is a fine social observation. For three reasons:

One. What is censured is not a bad intention. The person conversing wishes to harm no one; on the contrary, he is enjoying being there. The root of the word (uns — cohesion) says this plainly.

Two. What is censured is an excess. Entering is not forbidden, eating is not forbidden, talking is not forbidden. What is forbidden is going on after the business is over. That is, the boundary is not in the behaviour but in the duration.

Three. And precisely for that reason it is hard to notice. The person knows he is doing nothing bad; he does not see that the host is uncomfortable, because the discomfort is not voiced. The verse says this too: fa-yastaḥyī minkum — "he is too shy to tell you."

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the joining of the "taking pleasure" sense of the root with the note of ḥayāʾ in the continuation of the verse.

فَيَسْتَحْىِۦ مِنكُمْ وَٱللَّهُ لَا يَسْتَحْىِۦ مِنَ ٱلْحَقِّ

The most elegant sentence in the verse.

ٱسْتَحْيَا — root ح-ي-ي. It occurred in the forty-fourth verse as taḥiyya: the primary sense of the root is life. Ḥayāʾ — shame, reticence; and the lexicographers make the link thus: blood rushes to the face of the one who is ashamed, that is, a sign of life appears.

And what the sentence does is this: a vicious circle is described and broken.

The vicious circle: the host is uncomfortable → he is too shy to say so → the guest does not understand → he goes on.

The break: wa'llāhu lā yastaḥyī mina'l-ḥaqq — what needs to be said is said.

This is a structure that must be recorded, and I give it as my own reading: to resolve a social bind the verse brings in not one of the parties but a third voice. The host cannot say it; the text says it.

And this explains why the rule exists: some boundaries cannot be defended by the one they belong to. Because the defence itself damages the relationship it is trying to protect. The function of a rule begins exactly here: not leaving a person to defend his own boundary case by case.

The same expression occurs once more in the Qurʾān: "God is not ashamed to give the likeness of a gnat" (al-Baqara 2/26inna'llāha lā yastaḥyī an yaḍriba mathalan). In both places the same structure: the removal of a reticence about speaking.

مِن وَرَآءِ حِجَابٍ

حِجَاب — root ح-ج-ب. To cover, to veil, to be an obstacle between. Ḥājib — a doorkeeper, a chamberlain; and the eyebrow (because it covers the eye).

And the sense of the word in this verse is concrete: a physical divider set between when a request is conveyed.

On the extent of this verse and on its present-day applications there are differing interpretations in Islamic thought. No legal ruling is issued in this commentary.

What emerges from the wording of the verse: the regulation takes as its subject a particular situation (something being asked for from the Prophet's house) and its ground is written explicitly in the verse.

ذَٰلِكُمْ أَطْهَرُ لِقُلُوبِكُمْ وَقُلُوبِهِنَّ — the ground

The root ط-ه-ر was treated at the thirty-third verse.

And the structure of the ground is worth recording — for three reasons:

One. The ground is given for both parties: li-qulūbikum wa qulūbihinn. It is not a one-sided protection.

Two. The ground is tied to the heart, not to outward appearance. The measure the sūra has maintained from the beginning.

Three. Again an elative: aṭhar — "purer". The aqsaṭ of the fifth verse, the adnā of the fifty-first, and the aṭhar here.

The sūra always gives its grounds in the comparative pattern — "more", not "most". I record this as my own reading; its ground is the unity of the pattern in the three verses.

وَمَا كَانَ لَكُمْ أَن تُؤْذُوا۟ رَسُولَ ٱللَّهِ — the axis of injury

The root أ-ذ-ي occurs twice in this verse (yuʾdhi'l-nabiyy and an tuʾdhū rasūla'llāh).

And the two occurrences are on different levels:

OccurrenceWhatThe agent
kāna yuʾdhi'l-nabiyyDiscomfort given unawaresThose who linger over talk
an tuʾdhū rasūla'llāhA general prohibitionEveryone

That is, the verse names with the same word a discomfort given unawares as well.

This is worth recording: adhā does not depend on intention. No one may wish to hurt; the verse still names the act adhā.

I give this as my own reading; its ground is that the two occurrences are framed with the same word.

On the final ruling of the verse

The ruling at the end of the verse — that his wives are not to be married after the Prophet — links directly with the statement wa azwājuhu ummahātuhum in the sixth verse.

And the link must be recorded: the sixth verse had stated a standing; the fifty-third writes one consequence of that standing explicitly.

This confirms what was recorded at the sixth verse: there is debate about the extent of that standing, but this is the consequence most plainly written into the text.

What this says to the present

This verse says the most concrete things that can be said about privacy, and it gives three measures for today.

One. An invitation is not a permission of unlimited access.

The verse counts being invited, entering and eating all as legitimate. The only thing it limits is what comes after the business is over. That is, a door's being opened does not mean that door stays open indefinitely.

Two. Some boundaries cannot be defended by the one they belong to.

The verse's note fa-yastaḥyī minkum is the clearest expression of this. That a person does not say he is uncomfortable does not mean that he is not uncomfortable. And what prevents the discomfort from being voiced is most often not ill will but courtesy.

Its practical consequence: waiting for the other party's objection in order to measure whether a behaviour is acceptable is not a reliable method. The objection may not come — because objecting carries a cost of its own.

Three. Mustaʾnisīna li-ḥadīth — the expression most easily carried into today's language.

Taking pleasure in a conversation and not getting up, keeping a message exchange going, stretching out a meeting, prolonging a visit beyond what is needed. What all of them have in common is that the one who stays is enjoying it.

And the measure of the verse is worth noting: no one is accused. The verse points to the moment when the business is over and commands dispersal. The problem is not the behaviour itself; it is not seeing where it ends.


33/54-55

إِن تُبْدُوا۟ شَيْـًٔا أَوْ تُخْفُوهُ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ بِكُلِّ شَىْءٍ عَلِيمًا · لَّا جُنَاحَ عَلَيْهِنَّ فِىٓ ءَابَآئِهِنَّ وَلَآ أَبْنَآئِهِنَّ وَلَآ إِخْوَٰنِهِنَّ وَلَآ أَبْنَآءِ إِخْوَٰنِهِنَّ وَلَآ أَبْنَآءِ أَخَوَٰتِهِنَّ وَلَا نِسَآئِهِنَّ وَلَا مَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُهُنَّ وَٱتَّقِينَ ٱللَّهَ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ كَانَ عَلَىٰ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ شَهِيدًا

In tubdū shayʾan aw tukhfūhu fa-inna'llāha kāna bi-kulli shayʾin ʿalīmā · Lā junāḥa ʿalayhinna fī ābāʾihinna wa lā abnāʾihinna wa lā ikhwānihinna wa lā abnāʾi ikhwānihinna wa lā abnāʾi akhawātihinna wa lā nisāʾihinna wa lā mā malakat aymānuhunn, wa'ttaqīna'llāh, inna'llāha kāna ʿalā kulli shayʾin shahīdā

"Whether you disclose a thing or conceal it, God knows all things. · There is no blame on them concerning their fathers, their sons, their brothers, their brothers' sons, their sisters' sons, their women, or those their right hands possess. And guard yourselves against God. God is Witness over all things."

The fifty-fourth verse: disclosing and concealing

A short verse, but it gathers up one of the sūra's axes.

أَبْدَىٰ / أَخْفَىٰ — to disclose / to conceal. And this pair occurred in the thirty-seventh verse: wa tukhfī fī nafsika ma'llāhu mubdīh.

VerseWhoWhat
37The ProphetHe was concealing it within himself; God was to bring it out
54EveryoneWhether you disclose or conceal

The same two roots, in the same sūra, once in a single event and once as a general rule.

And what was said of the Prophet in the thirty-seventh verse is repeated for everyone in the fifty-fourth. The method of the sūra: from the particular to the general.

I record this as my own reading.

And the placing of the verse immediately after the fifty-third is meaningful too: the fifty-third verse took as its subject a discomfort left unsaid (fa-yastaḥyī minkum). The fifty-fourth states that what is left unsaid is known too.

The fifty-fifth verse: the list of those within the degrees of kinship

The verse brings an exception to the regulation of the screen in the fifty-third verse and gives a list.

#Category
1Their fathers
2Their sons
3Their brothers
4Their brothers' sons
5Their sisters' sons
6Their women
7Those their right hands possess

The structure of the list is worth recording: the first five categories are established by the tie of blood.

And this links with the fourth and fifth verses of the sūra. There it was said that the tie of lineage cannot be established by speech; here a consequence of the tie of lineage becomes visible: the list of kinship is drawn according to blood.

That is, the sūra shows a second application of the principle in the fourth verse — the first was in the thirty-seventh (the wife of an adopted son), the second is here (the degrees of kinship).

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the list rests on lineage.

In Sūrat al-Nūr (24/31) there is a wider list, and the differences between the two lists have been taken up in classical exegesis. This commentary does not enter into legal detail.

وَلَا مَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُهُنَّ — the note entered at the fiftieth verse holds here too; I do not repeat it.

وَٱتَّقِينَ ٱللَّهَ — after the list

And after the list a command comes: wa'ttaqīna'llāh.

This is a fact of word order worth recording: immediately after a list of permission a command of taqwā is placed.

And its function is this: the list shows where a boundary does not end. But the existence of the list does not mean that no measure at all remains with those inside it.

The link with the first verse of the sūra: the command ittaqi'llāh was given to the Prophet at the head of the sūra. In the fifty-fifth verse the same command is repeated in the feminine plural form.

شَهِيد — the verse-ending

Root: ش-ه-د. To be present, to see, to bear witness. In the forty-fifth verse shāhid was used of the Prophet; here shahīd is used of God.

The same root, with two different subjects, ten verses apart. I record it.

And the agreement of the verse-ending with the verse: the verse regulates a field not seen from outside (the inside of the house) and closes with the name that states the widest form of seeing.


33/56

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ وَمَلَٰٓئِكَتَهُۥ يُصَلُّونَ عَلَى ٱلنَّبِىِّ يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ صَلُّوا۟ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلِّمُوا۟ تَسْلِيمًا

Inna'llāha wa malāʾikatahu yuṣallūna ʿala'l-nabiyy, yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū ṣallū ʿalayhi wa sallimū taslīmā

"Indeed God and His angels send ṣalāt upon the Prophet. O you who believe! Send ṣalāt upon him too, and greet him with a full greeting of peace."

The root ص-ل-و

This root was treated at al-Fātiḥa and in many other places; here I focus on the word's sense in this verse.

On the concrete sense of the root the lexicographers record several things, none of them certain:

ExplanationWhat it says
صَلَوَان (ṣalawān)The two movable bones on either side of the waist; a link is made with the bending in prayer
صَلَّى (ṣallā)In horse racing the horse that comes second — the one following the ṣalā of the first. From this "coming behind, following"
اِصْطَلَىTo come near a fire, to warm oneself (the root ص-ل-ي — counted as separate)

These derivations are not certain and I build no meaning upon them. What must be recorded is that the word carries in Arabic a sense of turning towards and attaching oneself.

The ṣalāt of three subjects — a table

The most striking side of the verse is that the same verb is ascribed to three different subjects. And though the verb is the same, its counterpart is not.

In classical exegesis these three counterparts are distinguished thus:

SubjectWhat the ṣalāt corresponds toIts ground
GodMercy, praise, exaltation; mention in the presence of the angelsThe state of the verb's agent; the use of the same verb of the believers at al-Aḥzāb 33/43 with the ground given as li-yukhrijakum mina'l-ẓulumāti ila'l-nūr
The angelsSupplication, seeking forgivenessThe statement in the Qurʾān that the angels seek forgiveness for the believers (al-Muʾmin 40/7; al-Shūrā 42/5)
PeopleSupplication, the sending of blessings and peaceThe command of the verse: ṣallū ʿalayhi wa sallimū

This distinction is widely recorded in classical exegesis. And it has a counterpart in the language: the same verb takes a different content according to the state of the agent.

Its parallel in Arabic is common: the same verb says one thing when done from above downwards and another when done from below upwards.

No preference is imposed in this commentary; the classical distinction is conveyed.

The word order of the verse

And the word order of the verse is worth recording.

The sentence begins with a statement: inna'llāha wa malāʾikatahu yuṣallūna ʿala'l-nabiyy. Then a command comes: ṣallū ʿalayhi.

That is, the command comes after a statement — and the ground of the command becomes the statement itself. The verse does not say "do this because it is beneficial"; it says "this is already happening, join in."

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the order of the two sentences.

And the tense of the verb: yuṣallūna — imperfect, conveying continuity. That is, what is described is not a single occurrence but something ongoing.

وَسَلِّمُوا۟ تَسْلِيمًا

Again a cognate accusative. The seventh reinforcement in the sūra.

And the root س-ل-م for the fourth time in this sūra (22, 35, 44, 56).

And the link with the twenty-second verse is worth recording: there too the word taslīm was not in the same cognate-accusative pattern, but it came from the same root and named the believers' response in the face of the siege (mā zādahum illā īmānan wa taslīmā).

There are thirty-four verses between the two, and both use the same root. I record it.

A comparison of the two verses

I recorded at the forty-third verse that the same structure is used twice in the sūra; here I complete it.

33/4333/56
Subjecthuwa… wa malāʾikatuhuinna'llāha wa malāʾikatahu
Recipientʿalaykum — the believersʿala'l-nabiyy — the Prophet
The groundli-yukhrijakum mina'l-ẓulumāti ila'l-nūr
A commandNone (a statement)Yes: ṣallū ʿalayhi

And the difference is worth recording: in the forty-third verse there is a ground, in the fifty-sixth there is a command. The first says what it is for, the second what is to be done.

I record this as my own reading.

What this says to the present

The measure of the verse says something about how a command is framed.

The command arises not from an obligation but from an invitation to join something already going on. The sentence first states what is, then asks for participation.

And this changes the weight of the command: the person is not beginning something; he is being added to something that is already happening.


33/57-58

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يُؤْذُونَ ٱللَّهَ وَرَسُولَهُۥ لَعَنَهُمُ ٱللَّهُ فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ وَأَعَدَّ لَهُمْ عَذَابًا مُّهِينًا · وَٱلَّذِينَ يُؤْذُونَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ وَٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ بِغَيْرِ مَا ٱكْتَسَبُوا۟ فَقَدِ ٱحْتَمَلُوا۟ بُهْتَٰنًا وَإِثْمًا مُّبِينًا

Inna'lladhīna yuʾdhūna'llāha wa rasūlahu laʿanahumu'llāhu fi'l-dunyā wa'l-ākhirati wa aʿadda lahum ʿadhāban muhīnā · Wa'lladhīna yuʾdhūna'l-muʾminīna wa'l-muʾmināti bi-ghayri ma'ktasabū fa-qadi'ḥtamalū buhtānan wa ithman mubīnā

"Those who injure God and His Messenger — God has cursed them in this world and the hereafter, and has prepared for them a humiliating punishment. · And those who injure believing men and believing women for something they have not done have taken upon themselves a slander and a manifest sin."

Two steps of the axis of injury

The two verses use the same verb (yuʾdhūna) with two different objects and state two different outcomes.

Verse 57Verse 58
Who is injuredGod and His MessengerBelieving men and women
The notebi-ghayri ma'ktasabū — for something they have not done
The outcomeCurse and punishmentTaking on buhtān and ithm

And that the two verses come one after the other is one of the most striking facts of word order in the sūra.

Immediately after recounting the injury done to the Prophet, the Qurʾān recounts the injury done to ordinary believers. And it uses the same verb for both.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the succession of the two verses and the shared verb.

يُؤْذُونَ ٱللَّهَ — the sense of the expression

Classical exegesis has dwelt on this expression, because the injuring of God cannot be thought of in its literal sense.

The classical explanations:

ExplanationWhat it says
FigurativeThe expression conveys acts with which God is not pleased; "injury" here is figurative
Ascribing to God what is done to His MessengerSince the two subjects are named together, the act belongs properly to the second
Denial and slanderWhat is meant is saying about God what does not befit Him

I do not impose a preference. And the note of tanzīh entered at al-Ḥadīd (57/4 and 57/29) and at al-Baqara (2/115) holds here too: in speaking about God human qualities are not fastened onto Him, and al-Shūrā 42/11 (laysa ka-mithlihī shayʾ) stands as the limit.

بِغَيْرِ مَا ٱكْتَسَبُوا۟ — the function of the note

ٱكْتَسَبَ — root ك-س-ب. To earn; in Form VIII (iktisāb) it generally conveys an effort and an intent.

And this distinction (kasaba / iktasaba) was recorded at al-Baqara: at al-Baqara 2/286 the two forms come side by side and the lexicographers record that the first is used of good and the second of evil.

The function of the note is this: the verse takes as its subject undeserved injury. That is, a response to something a person has actually done is not the subject of this verse.

And this explains why the verse ends with the word buhtān.

بُهْتَٰن — root ب-ه-ت

And the concrete sense of the root must be dwelt on: bahata — to leave someone dumbfounded, to astonish him to the point of freezing. The Qurʾān uses the root in this sense: "Abraham… so the one who disbelieved was left dumbfounded" (al-Baqara 2/258fa-buhita'lladhī kafar).

From this comes the sense buhtān — slander. And the link is this: slander freezes the one it is aimed at. The person does not know what to say, because he has no connection at all with what is being levelled at him.

This is the most elegant side of the word and I record it: Arabic has named slander by the victim's reaction. The name of the offence comes not from the offender's act but from the state of the one wronged.

And the link with al-Ḥujurāt: that sūra was from beginning to end about wounding with speech — mockery, nicknames, surmise, backbiting. Al-Aḥzāb 33/58 closes the same matter with a sentence of ruling.

ٱحْتَمَلُوا۟ — "they have taken upon themselves"

Root: ح-م-ل. To carry, to take on.

And this root will return in the seventy-second verse of the sūra: wa ḥamalahā'l-insān — "and man took it up."

The comparison of the two occurrences is worth recording:

VerseWhat is taken upHow
58buhtānan wa ithman mubīnāThe slanderer takes it on unawares
72al-amānaMan takes it on by accepting it

The same root, once a burden taken without wanting it, once a burden undertaken. I record it and shall return to it at the seventy-second verse.

What this says to the present

The measure of the fifty-eighth verse is one of those most needed today.

The verse ties injury to a matter of desert: bi-ghayri ma'ktasabū. That is, the question is not "is this person bad" but "did this person do it".

And the verse names injury done over something not done buhtān — with a word whose root is "to leave dumbfounded".

Its present-day form is concrete: to speak about a person over something he has not done leaves him defenceless. Because a defence is possible only about something that actually happened. Against something that did not happen there is no defence — only bewilderment.

The root of the word says exactly this.


33/59

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلنَّبِىُّ قُل لِّأَزْوَٰجِكَ وَبَنَاتِكَ وَنِسَآءِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ يُدْنِينَ عَلَيْهِنَّ مِن جَلَٰبِيبِهِنَّ ذَٰلِكَ أَدْنَىٰٓ أَن يُعْرَفْنَ فَلَا يُؤْذَيْنَ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا

Yā ayyuha'l-nabiyyu qul li-azwājika wa banātika wa nisāʾi'l-muʾminīna yudnīna ʿalayhinna min jalābībihinn, dhālika adnā an yuʿrafna fa-lā yuʾdhayn, wa kāna'llāhu ghafūran raḥīmā

"O Prophet! Say to your wives, your daughters and the believing women: let them draw their jilbābs over themselves. That is more likely that they be recognised and not injured. God is Forgiving, Merciful."

A note at the outset

Per the method (Method), no legal ruling is issued on this verse. What will be done is this:

1. The lexical sense of the word and what the lexicographers give as its counterpart in that period will be conveyed. 2. The ground the verse itself gives will be brought forward. 3. It will be recorded that the rulings the schools have drawn from this verse differ, and the note "it is not binding" will be entered. 4. Current debates and politics will not be entered.

The widening of the address

This is the sūra's fifth and last address yā ayyuha'l-nabiyy.

And those addressed are listed in three circles:

CircleWho
1azwājika — your wives
2banātika — your daughters
3nisāʾi'l-muʾminīn — the believing women

This widening must be recorded and was touched on at the thirty-third verse: when the sūra wishes to generalise a ruling it does so explicitly.

In the twenty-eighth verse the address was azwājika alone; in verses thirty to thirty-four it was yā nisāʾa'l-nabiyy. In the fifty-ninth a third circle is added.

I record this as a datum of the text.

يُدْنِينَ — root د-ن-و

To be near. And in Form IV (adnā) "to bring near, to let hang down, to draw over".

And this root occurs in the sūra for the third time: adnā (51), adnā (in the second half of 59), and here yudnīna. The word dunyā is also from the same root (28).

And the root occurs twice within the verse: yudnīna (the verb) and adnā (the elative). Two words from the same root, one carrying the command and the other the ground.

This is a fact of word order and I record it.

The sense of the verb: to bring near, to let fall, to draw down a thing towards oneself or towards a place. The verse describes how the garment is to be used as a movement.

جَلَٰبِيب — the sense of the word

Singular جِلْبَاب. Root: ج-ل-ب. And the primary sense of the root is to bring a thing from one place to another, to draw it along: jalaba — he brought, he conveyed. Jalb — drawing, bringing.

From this jilbāb — a garment worn over, brought over the body, covering.

What the lexicographers give as the word's counterpart in that period is this, and it carries no full certainty:

The descriptions found in the sourcesWhat it says
A wide covering that covers from head to footAn outer garment taken over the body
A garment larger than a head-covering and smaller than a ridāʾA size between two garments
The outer covering a woman puts on over her dressTaken over the indoor garment

The lexicographers do not agree on the word's exact counterpart. The common point that can be recorded is this: a jilbāb is not an inner garment but a covering taken over when going out.

And the particle min must be dwelt on: min jalābībihinn — "of their jilbābs". Whether this min is partitive or explicative (indicating the class) has been debated in classical exegesis.

ReadingWhat it says
Partitive"Let them draw a part of their jilbābs over themselves" — a portion of the covering
Explicative"Let them draw something of the jilbāb kind over themselves"

I do not impose a preference. The same discussion was recorded for the particle minhum at al-Fatḥ 48/29.

And I record this in addition: the verse does not give how the covering is to be drawn, what area it is to cover, its measure or its form. The only thing it gives is a verb: yudnīna ʿalayhinna.

ذَٰلِكَ أَدْنَىٰٓ أَن يُعْرَفْنَ فَلَا يُؤْذَيْنَ — the verse's own ground

This is the most important place in the verse and must be brought forward.

Because the verse writes its own ground. And the ground has two steps:

1. أَن يُعْرَفْنَ — that they be recognised. 2. فَلَا يُؤْذَيْنَ — and thereby not injured.

عَرَفَ — root ع-ر-ف. To know, to recognise. And this root for the third time in the sūra (in 6 and 32 as maʿrūf, here as yuʿrafna).

The particle فَ here conveys a consequence: the result of being recognised is not being injured.

And the verb yuʾdhayna — the root أ-ذ-ي — occurs for the sixth time in this sūra.

That is, the sūra's axis of injury is tied here to a precaution, and the close comes with a precaution.

I enter three notes about the ground of the verse:

One. The ground is tied not to a fault in the woman but to a threat outside. The verse does not say "this is more decorous" or "this is more fitting". It states a consequence: they will not be injured.

Two. The ground is in the passive: yuʿrafna (they are recognised), yuʾdhayna (they are injured). The agent of neither verb is named. That is, the verse does not name the party that recognises or the party that injures; it states only the outcome.

Three. And the same pattern as in the fifty-first verse: dhālika adnā. Both verses bring a regulation and give its ground with this pattern, and both grounds look to people's inward condition and to what they are exposed to.

I draw these three notes from the wording of the verse.

Historical background — in the language of "it is transmitted"

In the classical exegetical sources it is transmitted that at that time some women in the city were harassed outside, and that this regulation aimed to prevent the harassment by making them recognisable. In the sixtieth verse "those who spread baseless news in the city" will be named in the same context.

I give this account with the note "it is transmitted", do not enter into its detail, and do not make it a condition of the verse's meaning.

What emerges from the text itself runs in the same direction anyway: the verse's clause of ground speaks of a possibility of being injured. That is, even with no information brought in from outside, the text points to an atmosphere of threat.

On the differing rulings of the schools

There are differences among the schools and the exegetes on the rulings drawn from this verse and from al-Nūr 24/31. The difference gathers at these points:

The point at issueThe situation
The extent of the coveringThere are differing views on which areas are to be covered
The function of the particle minPartitive or explicative — recorded above
Whether the ruling depends on the groundIt has been debated what the ruling would be if the ground (being recognised) were removed
Its relation to al-Nūr 24/31How the two verses complete one another

No side is taken in any of these debates in this commentary and no ruling is issued.

And I enter the note of Method explicitly: what is given here is a conveying of information, and it is not binding. A ruling about anyone's practice is not the subject of this text.

Current debates and politics are not entered. This verse has been the material of a great many political disputes over the last two centuries; this commentary is not, and cannot be, a party to any of them.

وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا — the verse-ending

And that the verse ends with a statement of forgiveness is worth recording.

This is the fourth time in the sūra (5, 24, 50, 59). And all four come after a regulation.

VerseThe regulationThe verse-ending
5The ascription of lineageghafūran raḥīmā
24The close of the siege sectionghafūran raḥīmā
50A ruling particular to the Prophetghafūran raḥīmā
59The jilbābghafūran raḥīmā

Wherever it lays down a ruling the sūra enters a note of forgiveness. I record this as my own reading; its ground is the position of the four verse-endings.

And this has a function: a statement of forgiveness coming after a regulation means that it is reckoned with from the outset that the regulation cannot be carried out flawlessly.

What this says to the present

In speaking about what this verse says to the present it is necessary to keep to the verse's own ground.

And that ground is this: an yuʿrafna fa-lā yuʾdhayna — that they be recognised and not injured.

This ground puts a fact on record: in a society people may be under the risk of being injured outside. And the verse accepts this as a datum and proposes a precaution.

But there is something the verse does not say, and it must be recorded: the verse does not legitimise injury. On the contrary, the preceding verse (58) had named injury explicitly as buhtān and ithm.

That the two verses come one after the other is important for this reason, and I record it as my own reading:

VerseTo whomWhat it says
58To the one who injuresbuhtānan wa ithman mubīnā — this is what you have taken on
59To the one injuredA precaution

That is, the sūra does not resolve the matter one-sidedly. The ruling about the one who injures was given in the preceding verse; the precaution is proposed in the following one.

And this order must be recorded: the ruling comes first, the precaution after. The sūra first names the act, then states the precaution.

This is a datum of the text and I draw no legal conclusion from it.


33/60-62

لَّئِن لَّمْ يَنتَهِ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقُونَ وَٱلَّذِينَ فِى قُلُوبِهِم مَّرَضٌ وَٱلْمُرْجِفُونَ فِى ٱلْمَدِينَةِ لَنُغْرِيَنَّكَ بِهِمْ ثُمَّ لَا يُجَاوِرُونَكَ فِيهَآ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا · مَّلْعُونِينَ أَيْنَمَا ثُقِفُوٓا۟ أُخِذُوا۟ وَقُتِّلُوا۟ تَقْتِيلًا · سُنَّةَ ٱللَّهِ فِى ٱلَّذِينَ خَلَوْا۟ مِن قَبْلُ وَلَن تَجِدَ لِسُنَّةِ ٱللَّهِ تَبْدِيلًا

La-in lam yantahi'l-munāfiqūna wa'lladhīna fī qulūbihim maraḍun wa'l-murjifūna fi'l-madīnati la-nughriyannaka bihim thumma lā yujāwirūnaka fīhā illā qalīlā · Malʿūnīna aynamā thuqifū ukhidhū wa quttilū taqtīlā · Sunnata'llāhi fi'lladhīna khalaw min qabl, wa lan tajida li-sunnati'llāhi tabdīlā

"If the hypocrites, those in whose hearts is sickness, and those who spread baseless news in the city do not desist, We shall surely set you against them; then they will be your neighbours there only a little while. · Accursed; wherever they are found they are seized and killed. · This is God's way with those who passed away before. And you will find no change in the way of God."

Three groups

In the twelfth verse two groups were named; here a third is added.

GroupThe wordWhat
1al-munāfiqūnThose with two doors
2alladhīna fī qulūbihim maraḍThose with sickness in their hearts
3al-murjifūnThose who spread baseless news

And the listing of three separate expressions supports the observation I recorded at the twelfth verse: the distinction appears to be deliberate.

ٱلْمُرْجِفُون — root ر-ج-ف

The root of this word is one of the most striking choices of word in the sūra.

ر-ج-ف: to shake, to make tremble, to rock violently. Rajfa — a quaking; and it was treated in the context of the sūra at al-Nāziʿāt (yawma tarjufu'l-rājifa).

And the definition recorded at al-Muzzammil: "إِرْجَاف (irjāf) — unsettling people by spreading baseless news." I rely on that treatment.

This verse was already mentioned at al-Nāziʿāt too.

Now the real question: how do the "shaking" sense of the root and the "spreading baseless news" sense come together?

The link the lexicographers record is this: irjāf is the spreading of reports that shake a community. That is, the word names the act not by itself but by its effect — just as buhtān (58) is named by the state of the one wronged.

And this sets up a word-web within the sūra, and I record it:

VerseWordRootWhat is shaken
11zulzilū zilzālan shadīdāز-ل-ز-لThe believers — under siege
60al-murjifūnر-ج-فThe city — by a report

The sūra records two kinds of shaking: one by a threat coming from outside, the other by a report spread from within. And the word used for the second is derived from the shaking itself.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the concrete senses of the two roots are the same.

فِى ٱلْمَدِينَةِ — the name of the city. In the thirteenth verse Yathrib occurred in the mouths of those calling for flight; here al-Madīna. In the same sūra, the same city, two different names — this was recorded at the thirteenth verse as a datum of the text.

لَنُغْرِيَنَّكَ بِهِمْ — the conditional clause

أَغْرَىٰ — root غ-ر-و / غ-ر-ي. To make a thing stick to another; ghirāʾ — glue. From this "to set someone upon a matter, to set him against".

The Qurʾān uses the root once more: "So We stirred up enmity and hatred among them" (al-Māʾida 5/14, 5/64aghraynā).

And that the sentence is conditional must be recorded: la-in lam yantahi — "if they do not desist".

يَنتَهِ — root ن-ه-ي. To desist, to give up; nahy — prohibition.

That is, the verse does not state a ruling, it lays down a condition. And whether the condition came about is not said in the text.

This is a fact of word order that must be recorded and is important in view of the method (Method): the verse is a sentence of warning and the way out is in the first clauseif they do not desist.

مَّلْعُونِينَ أَيْنَمَا ثُقِفُوٓا۟ — on the sixty-first verse

This verse describes a sanction to be applied in the order of a city under the conditions of that day, and it stands in a single, historical context.

Per the method (Method) I record explicitly:

One. The verse is dependent on the condition in the sixtieth verse. It is not a sentence of ruling on its own.

Two. The verse concerns not an identity but an act that is described: shaking the city by spreading baseless news.

Three. No conclusion about any person or group today can be drawn from this verse. The measure recorded at al-Munāfiqūn holds here too.

Four. No legal ruling at all is drawn from this verse in this commentary.

The words:

ثُقِفُوٓا۟ — root ث-ق-ف. And the sense of the root is interesting: thaqifa — to find and seize a thing; and also to straighten what is crooked (the straightening of a spear: tathqīf). Thaqīf — quick-witted, sharp of understanding.

The Qurʾān uses the root in several places: "Wherever you come upon them…" (al-Baqara 2/191).

قُتِّلُوا۟ تَقْتِيلًا — a cognate accusative. The eighth reinforcement in the sūra.

سُنَّةَ ٱللَّهِ — the second occurrence in the sūra

It was treated at the thirty-eighth verse; I rely on that treatment.

And the comparison of the two occurrences is worth recording:

VerseContextFor what
38What is laid down for the ProphetThat a regulation is a continuing one
62The order of the cityThat a sanction is a continuing one

Both come after a regulation — this was recorded at the thirty-eighth verse.

وَلَن تَجِدَ لِسُنَّةِ ٱللَّهِ تَبْدِيلًاthe root ب-د-ل, for the third time in this sūra (23, 52, 62).

VerseWhat does not change / is not changed
23Those who kept their word did not change their word
52That wives are not to be exchanged
62No change is found in the way of God

The same root on three separate levels: a human word, a human relationship, a divine working. I record it.

And the note entered at al-Fatḥ must be repeated here: the application of the concept of sunnat Allāh to contemporary events is not entered into; the concept is a measure for understanding the past, not an authority for judging the present.


33/63-64

يَسْـَٔلُكَ ٱلنَّاسُ عَنِ ٱلسَّاعَةِ قُلْ إِنَّمَا عِلْمُهَا عِندَ ٱللَّهِ وَمَا يُدْرِيكَ لَعَلَّ ٱلسَّاعَةَ تَكُونُ قَرِيبًا · إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَعَنَ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ وَأَعَدَّ لَهُمْ سَعِيرًا

Yasʾaluka'l-nāsu ʿani'l-sāʿah, qul innamā ʿilmuhā ʿinda'llāh, wa mā yudrīka laʿalla'l-sāʿata takūnu qarībā · Inna'llāha laʿana'l-kāfirīna wa aʿadda lahum saʿīrā

"People ask you about the Hour. Say: Knowledge of it is with God alone. And what will make you know? Perhaps the Hour is near. · Indeed God has cursed the disbelievers and has prepared for them a blazing fire."

The leaving of a question unanswered

This verse was mentioned at al-Nāziʿāt and its pattern was treated at al-Qadr and al-Balad. I rely on those treatments.

The finding recorded at al-Balad works here exactly:

"A consistent distinction in the Qurʾān: the pattern مَا أَدْرَاكَ (what made you know — the perfect) is used in places where an explanation follows. The pattern مَا يُدْرِيكَ (what will make you know — the imperfect) is used in places where no explanation follows, where the knowledge is left closed to man (for example about the time of the resurrection: al-Aḥzāb 33/63)."

This verse is one of the examples of that rule, and the rule is confirmed here: the pattern is mā yudrīka and no explanation follows it — what follows is a possibility: laʿalla'l-sāʿata takūnu qarībā.

And what was recorded at al-Qadr: "There the time of the resurrection is asked about and is not told."

إِنَّمَا عِلْمُهَا عِندَ ٱللَّهِ — restriction

إِنَّمَا — the particle of restriction. And for the second time in this sūra (33 and 63).

The structure of the answer is worth recording: the verse does not have him say "I do not know"; it has him say "the knowledge is there". That is, the answer is not a declaration of ignorance but the giving of an address.

I record this as my own reading.

لَعَلَّ ٱلسَّاعَةَ تَكُونُ قَرِيبًا

And there is an addition in the answer: the time is not told, but the possibility of its being near is stated.

This is a structure worth recording: the verse does not give the knowledge, but neither does it leave the knowledge without effect. That the time is unknown cannot be made a ground for postponing preparation.

قَرِيبًا — root ق-ر-ب. Near. And that the word comes masculine and not feminine (although al-sāʿa is feminine) is recorded by the lexicographers and explained in several ways; it produces no difference in meaning.

The sixty-fourth verse: a transition

Here the sūra enters its final block. Verses sixty-four to sixty-eight set up a scene, and that scene will close the matter of "obedience" which the sūra has been treating from the beginning.

سَعِير — root س-ع-ر. To catch fire, to blaze. Suʿār — the fire of hunger; siʿr — a price (that rises).


33/65-68

خَٰلِدِينَ فِيهَآ أَبَدًا لَّا يَجِدُونَ وَلِيًّا وَلَا نَصِيرًا · يَوْمَ تُقَلَّبُ وُجُوهُهُمْ فِى ٱلنَّارِ يَقُولُونَ يَٰلَيْتَنَآ أَطَعْنَا ٱللَّهَ وَأَطَعْنَا ٱلرَّسُولَا۠ · وَقَالُوا۟ رَبَّنَآ إِنَّآ أَطَعْنَا سَادَتَنَا وَكُبَرَآءَنَا فَأَضَلُّونَا ٱلسَّبِيلَا۠ · رَبَّنَآ ءَاتِهِمْ ضِعْفَيْنِ مِنَ ٱلْعَذَابِ وَٱلْعَنْهُمْ لَعْنًا كَبِيرًا

Khālidīna fīhā abadā, lā yajidūna waliyyan wa lā naṣīrā · Yawma tuqallabu wujūhuhum fi'l-nāri yaqūlūna yā laytanā aṭaʿna'llāha wa aṭaʿna'l-rasūlā · Wa qālū rabbanā innā aṭaʿnā sādatanā wa kubarāʾanā fa-aḍallūna'l-sabīlā · Rabbanā ātihim ḍiʿfayni mina'l-ʿadhābi wa'lʿanhum laʿnan kabīrā

"Abiding therein for ever; they will find neither friend nor helper. · On the day their faces are turned about in the Fire they will say, 'If only we had obeyed God and obeyed the Messenger.' · And they will say: Our Lord! We obeyed our masters and our great ones, and they led us astray from the way. · Our Lord! Give them a double punishment and curse them with a great curse."

The close of the axis of obedience

In its first verse the sūra had laid down a prohibition of obedience: wa lā tuṭiʿi'l-kāfirīna wa'l-munāfiqīn.

And in the sixty-sixth and sixty-seventh verses the consequence of that prohibition's being broken is shown as a scene.

The root ط-و-ع occurs four times in these four verses:

VerseWordTo whom
66aṭaʿna'llāhTo God (if only)
66aṭaʿna'l-rasūlTo the Messenger (if only)
67aṭaʿnā sādatanāTo our masters (in fact)
67wa kubarāʾanāAnd to our great ones

And the "willingness" sense of the root — recorded at the sūra's first verse — is at work here with all its weight.

Because ṭāʿa is not something done under compulsion. The sentence does not say "they forced us"; it says "we obeyed". And the subject of the verb is themselves.

This is a fact that must be recorded, and I give it as my own reading: the verse makes those speaking frame a sentence of excuse, and that sentence refutes itself. The verb of the sentence framed to throw the blame on another stays upon them.

يَوْمَ تُقَلَّبُ وُجُوهُهُمْ — root ق-ل-ب

And here is the most striking turn of a word in the sūra.

The root ق-ل-ب: to turn, to turn upside down. And qalb (the heart) is from the same root — because it is the thing that constantly turns, that passes from state to state.

This root was opened up in the fourth verse of the sūra: mā jaʿala'llāhu li-rajulin min qalbayni fī jawfih.

And in the sixty-sixth verse the same root returns as a verb: tuqallabu wujūhuhum — "their faces are turned about".

VerseWordWhat
4qalbaynTwo hearts — an impossibility
10al-qulūbHearts reaching the throats
12fī qulūbihim maraḍDiseased hearts
26fī qulūbihim al-ruʿbHearts filled with fear
32fī qalbihī maraḍA diseased heart
51mā fī qulūbikumWhat is in the hearts
53li-qulūbikum wa qulūbihinnThe hearts of both parties
66tuqallabu wujūhuhumFaces turned about

The sūra closes with the face the root it opened with the heart. And that the verb is passive is worth noting: tuqallabu — they are turned; they do not turn themselves.

I record this as my own reading: the fourth verse had said that there cannot be two centres inside a person. In the sixty-sixth verse the faces of those who obeyed in two directions at once are turned about. There is a link between the two ends of the root, and this link touches the founding principle of the sūra.

This is an inference and not a transmitted report. Its ground is the distribution of the root in the sūra.

سَادَتَنَا وَكُبَرَآءَنَا — two words

سَادَة — singular سَيِّد. Root: س-و-د. A master, a leader. The lexicographers differ about the root of the word; on one view it is connected with sawād (a crowd, a dark mass): the one who stands at the head of a group.

كُبَرَآء — singular كَبِير. Root: ك-ب-ر. Great. And kibr is from the same root.

That the two words are enumerated separately is worth recording: one is a position (master), the other a standing (great one). That is, there are two separate reasons for following: authority and prestige.

I record this as my own reading.

And one further note, per the method (Method): the verse gives no names. And no person or group today can be identified from this verse. What the verse describes is a form of relationship: a person's handing over his own choice to another's position.

ٱلرَّسُولَا۠ / ٱلسَّبِيلَا۠ — a difference of reading

The difference of reading recorded for al-ẓunūnā in the tenth verse holds here too.

The alif at the end of these three words — al-ẓunūnā (10), al-Rasūlā (66), al-Sabīlā (67) — is read differently among the readers: some read it both in continuous recitation and at a pause, some only at a pause, some not at all.

It does not change the meaning; it is a difference of reading bound up with the harmony of the verse-endings, and in the script of the muṣḥaf the alif is written.

And that these three words fall at three separate places in the sūra is worth noting: one in the middle of the siege, two in the final scene.

رَبَّنَآ ءَاتِهِمْ ضِعْفَيْنِ — a request

The root ض-ع-ف was treated at the thirtieth verse: both weakness and doubling.

And the expression ḍiʿfayn occurs in the sūra for the second time:

VerseFor whomWhy
30The Prophet's wives (in a conditional clause)The weight of the standing
68Those who led astrayThe weight of leading another astray

The same expression, for two different reasons. And what joins the two is this: being in a position that affects others.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that both occurrences of the expression concern a standing.

What this says to the present

The sentence of the sixty-seventh verse is one of the most often repeated excuses in human history: "We obeyed our masters and our great ones; they led us astray."

And the verse does not accept this excuse. The reason is said by the sentence's own verb: aṭaʿnāwe obeyed.

The finding recorded at al-Ṣāffāt for a similar scene holds here too: "This is not a defence but a levelling. The other side was saying 'you led me astray'; the answer becomes 'yes, but we too were astray.' That is, the offence is admitted but the difference is not removed."

In al-Aḥzāb there is one step further: here the other side's answer is not given. The sentence stands one-sided and rots from within.

Its present-day form is plain: a person's going along behind an institution, a leader, a group is a choice — and a choice, however natural it may look, is that person's own act. The verse says that responsibility cannot be handed over.


33/69

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَكُونُوا۟ كَٱلَّذِينَ ءَاذَوْا۟ مُوسَىٰ فَبَرَّأَهُ ٱللَّهُ مِمَّا قَالُوا۟ وَكَانَ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ وَجِيهًا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lā takūnū ka'lladhīna ādhaw Mūsā fa-barraʾahu'llāhu mimmā qālū, wa kāna ʿinda'llāhi wajīhā

"O you who believe! Do not be like those who injured Moses. God cleared him of what they said. And he was of high standing with God."

The last link of the axis of injury

The root أ-ذ-ي occurs in this verse for the seventh and last time.

And the sūra closes the root by tying it to a past example. In the forty-eighth verse the Prophet had been told "pay no heed to their injury"; in the fifty-third the discomfort given unawares was recorded; in the fifty-seventh and fifty-eighth a ruling was issued; in the fifty-ninth a precaution was proposed.

The sixty-ninth verse adds a dimension of history to the matter: this is nothing new.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the distribution of the root in the sūra.

مِمَّا قَالُوا۟ — what it was that was said

The verse does not give what it was that was said. It says only that there was something said and that God cleared him of it.

This is a datum of the text and must be recorded. Various narratives are transmitted about this in classical exegesis; I do not enter into them, because the wording of the verse gives no content and the reports differ at the level of detail.

And there is one further reason for this: the function of the verse lies not in the content of the event but in its structure. The verse does not say "such-and-such a slander was made"; it says "something was said and God cleared him of it". The structure works independently of the content.

And a link must be made with the preceding section: the fifty-eighth verse had named injury over something not done buhtān. The sixty-ninth verse gives an instance of the same structure in history.

بَرَّأَ — root ب-ر-أ

To be free or quit of a thing, to slip clear, to be delivered. Barāʾa — distance, being clear of liability. This root was treated at al-Mumtaḥana (buraʾāʾ60/4).

And another branch of the root: bāriʾ — the maker (treated at al-Ḥashr). The lexicographers join the two branches on the common ground of "one thing's being separated from another".

The pattern: Form II (barraʾa) — it conveys intensity and completeness: "he cleared him entirely".

وَجِيه — root و-ج-ه

And the primary sense of the root is the face: wajh. Wajīh — one who has a face, one held in esteem, honoured; one whose face is clear before a community.

And the choice of this word sets up a contrast with the preceding verse, and this is a fact of word order that must be recorded:

VerseWordThe face
66tuqallabu wujūhuhumFaces turned about in the Fire
69kāna ʿinda'llāhi wajīhāHis face clear before God

The same root, three verses apart, in two opposite states. One the turning about of the face, the other the honour of the face.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the two words are from the same root.

And the Qurʾān uses this word once more: "The Messiah, Jesus son of Mary… of high standing (wajīh) in this world and in the hereafter" (Āl ʿImrān 3/45).

What this says to the present

The verse gives a command: lā takūnū ka'lladhīna… — "do not be like them."

And the form of the command is worth recording: the verse does not forbid a behaviour; it forbids resembling a position.

The difference is this: forbidding a behaviour requires that the behaviour be recognisable. Asking that one not resemble a position requires that the person compare his own situation with an example.

And comparison is harder, because a person generally does not call what he himself does by the name of that example.

And the last sentence of the verse lays down a measure: wa kāna ʿinda'llāhi wajīhā. That is, what was said did not change the worth of the one it was said about.

This agrees exactly with the founding principle of the sūra: the fourth verse said that speech does not change reality. The sixty-ninth verse repeats the same principle for slander.

Slander too is a piece of speech, and it too stays in the mouth. I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the two verses set up the same structure (speech / reality).


33/70-71

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَقُولُوا۟ قَوْلًا سَدِيدًا · يُصْلِحْ لَكُمْ أَعْمَٰلَكُمْ وَيَغْفِرْ لَكُمْ ذُنُوبَكُمْ وَمَن يُطِعِ ٱللَّهَ وَرَسُولَهُۥ فَقَدْ فَازَ فَوْزًا عَظِيمًا

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanu'ttaqu'llāha wa qūlū qawlan sadīdā · Yuṣliḥ lakum aʿmālakum wa yaghfir lakum dhunūbakum, wa man yuṭiʿi'llāha wa rasūlahu fa-qad fāza fawzan ʿaẓīmā

"O you who believe! Guard yourselves against God and speak a firm word. · Then He will set your works right for you and forgive you your sins. And whoever obeys God and His Messenger has attained a great attainment."

The axis of speech closes here

The sūra's axis of speech had opened in the fourth verse (qawlukum bi-afwāhikum) and taken a measure in the thirty-second (qawlan maʿrūfā). In the seventieth verse the final measure comes.

VerseThe constructionThe quality
4qawlukum bi-afwāhikumSpeech that stays in the mouth
32lā takhḍaʿna bi'l-qawlBending speech
32qawlan maʿrūfāRecognised speech
70qawlan sadīdāFirm speech

سَدِيد — root س-د-د

And the concrete sense of the root must be dwelt on, because the whole weight of the word lies there.

س-د-د: to close a breach, to stop it, to fill it. Sadd — a dam, a barrier (at al-Kahf 18/94 as saddan). Sidād — the stopper that closes the gap in a thing.

And the second branch of the root: sadād — accuracy, correctness, hitting the mark. Saddada'l-ramya — he made the shot hit its mark.

What joins the two branches?

The link the lexicographers record is this: both convey an exact fit. A dam is what fits the breach exactly; an accurate shot is one that lands exactly on the target. That is, sadīd means what has neither deficiency nor excess, what fills its place exactly.

And this describes what "firm speech" is, and I record it:

Qawlan sadīdā is not merely "true speech". In the logic of the root: speech that has no gap, that leaves no space, that hits its mark exactly.

Its opposite is not a lie — it is breached speech: true but incomplete, true but open to misunderstanding, true but out of its time or its place.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the two branches of sense in the root.

The Qurʾān uses the word once more, and the context there is instructive too: "Let them guard themselves against God and let them speak a firm word" (al-Nisāʾ 4/9) — there the context is the property of orphans and the situation of those left behind. In both places the word stands in a context of speech that produces consequences.

يُصْلِحْ لَكُمْ أَعْمَٰلَكُمْ — the outcome

And the most striking link of the verse is here.

The seventieth verse is about speech; the seventy-first about works. And the two are joined by a relation of condition and consequence: speak a firm word so that your works may be set right.

أَصْلَحَ — root ص-ل-ح. To make a thing useful, workable, serviceable. Ṣalāḥ — a thing's being in a state fit for its own work; the opposite of fasād.

And what must be recorded is this: the verse ties the setting right of speech to the setting right of works.

This order looks reversed. The expectation was: set your works right so that your speech may be true. The verse says the opposite.

And the sūra as a whole supports this order:

  • The fourth verse: a false word was trying to establish a false reality.
  • The thirteenth verse: a word of excuse was covering a flight.
  • The nineteenth verse: sharp tongues spoke after the danger had passed.
  • The fifty-eighth verse: a word of slander was loading on something that had not been done.

Throughout the sūra the corruption of speech comes before the corruption of behaviour. The seventieth verse begins the setting right from the same place.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the speech-behaviour orderings in the sūra.

فَازَ فَوْزًا عَظِيمًا

Again a cognate accusative. The ninth reinforcement in the sūra.

The root ف-و-ز: to be delivered, to attain one's desire; and a branch the lexicographers record: mafāza — a desert. The lexicographers differ on the link between the two senses; on one explanation the desert was named "the place of deliverance" in the hope of deliverance from it (an auspicious naming). This is not certain; I record it but build no meaning upon it.

What this says to the present

The measure of the verse can be gathered into a single sentence: setting right begins with speech.

And the root of the word sadīd makes this concrete: firm speech is speech that leaves no breach.

Its practical counterpart is this: it is not enough for a sentence to be true. The place left incomplete, the side left open to misunderstanding, the part left unsaid — all of these are breaches. And a breach is later filled with something else.

All the measures set out about speech at al-Ḥujurāt gather in this word: the loudness of a voice, the share of surmise, the effect of a nickname, the anatomy of backbiting. All of them had to do with how a piece of speech leaves a breach.


33/72

إِنَّا عَرَضْنَا ٱلْأَمَانَةَ عَلَى ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَٱلْجِبَالِ فَأَبَيْنَ أَن يَحْمِلْنَهَا وَأَشْفَقْنَ مِنْهَا وَحَمَلَهَا ٱلْإِنسَٰنُ إِنَّهُۥ كَانَ ظَلُومًا جَهُولًا

Innā ʿaraḍna'l-amānata ʿala'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi wa'l-jibāli fa-abayna an yaḥmilnahā wa ashfaqna minhā wa ḥamalaha'l-insān, innahu kāna ẓalūman jahūlā

"We offered the trust to the heavens, the earth and the mountains; they refused to carry it and shrank from it. And man took it up. He is indeed much given to wrong, much given to ignorance."

The closing verse of the sūra

This is the densest verse of the sūra, and it does the most unexpected thing a closing verse can do: it ties the whole subject of the sūra to man's position on the earth.

For seventy-one verses concrete things have been recounted: a siege, a regulation about adoption, a code of household conduct, a garment, a measure for speech. In the seventy-second verse the text suddenly changes altitude.

And this transition has a logic, and I record it as my own reading: everything recounted through the sūra was a matter of carrying. A pledge given was to be carried (15, 23); a standing was to be carried (30-31); a boundary was to be carried (53); a word was to be carried (70). The seventy-second verse takes carrying itself as its subject.

عَرَضْنَا — root ع-ر-ض

To lay a thing out in its breadth, to show, to offer. ʿArḍ — breadth (the opposite of ṭūl, length). Maʿriḍ — a place of display. Iʿrāḍ — turning away (turning aside).

And the concrete sense of the root — laying out in breadth — builds the picture of the verse: the trust was spread out before them. Not hidden, not imposed; set out.

The Qurʾān uses the root in a comparable scene: "Then He set them before the angels" (al-Baqara 2/31thumma ʿaraḍahum ʿala'l-malāʾika). That scene was treated at al-Baqara.

The parallel between the two scenes is worth recording: in both there is a setting before, and in both a distinction is drawn between man and other beings.

ٱلْأَمَانَة — root أ-م-ن

The primary sense of the root: to be in safety, to be without fear. Amn — security; īmān — trusting, giving security; amīn — trustworthy; amāna — what is left in trust.

This root was treated at al-Baqara, al-Ḥujurāt and al-Fatḥ; I rely on those treatments.

And there is a word-web that must be recorded: amāna and īmān are from the same root. In the thirty-fifth verse of the sūra al-muʾminīna wa'l-muʾmināt were enumerated; in the seventy-second the same root returns as a burden.

That is, the sūra opens the root as an attribute and closes it as a responsibility. I record this as my own reading.

What the trust is — the disagreement

The verse does not say what the trust is. And in classical exegesis this is one of the most debated questions.

I give the disagreement in a table. I do not impose a preference.

ViewWhat the trust isIts groundIts weak side
A. Obligation and responsibilityThe whole of religious obligation; being the addressee of commands and prohibitionsThe continuation of the verse: the one who accepted is described as ẓalūm and jahūl; the enumeration of outcomes in verse 73The concept is wide and its limit is indefinite
B. Reason and willThe power of choice; the capacity to distinguish good from evil and to preferThat the heavens and the mountains do not have this power; that obligation can be laid only upon a willThe word "reason" does not occur in the verse
C. The obligatory acts / acts of worshipPrayer, fasting and similar particular obligationsThe sense of the word amāna as "what is left and must be returned"It narrows the extent; it does not meet the weight of the verse
D. Vicegerency / responsibility for the earthMan's position on the earth and his responsibility to cultivate itThe parallel with al-Baqara 2/30The word "vicegerent" does not occur in the verse
E. Trusts between peopleWhat people leave with one another — property, a secret, an officeThe lexical sense of the word; al-Nisāʾ 4/58 (addu'l-amānāti ilā ahlihā)Its being offered to the heavens and the mountains is hard to explain

Two notes about this table:

One. These views do not entirely exclude one another. A, B and D are readings that feed one another: responsibility is possible only if there is a will; and a position on the earth is a position of responsibility.

Two. That the verse leaves the word indefinite is a datum of the text. Al-amāna comes with the definite article — that is, it points to something known — but its content is not opened.

I record this as an observation, not as a preference.

فَأَبَيْنَ أَن يَحْمِلْنَهَا — a comparison with Fuṣṣilat 41/11

And now comes the strongest datum of the text for this verse.

At Fuṣṣilat 41/11 the heavens and the earth were addressed: "He said to it and to the earth, 'Come, willingly or unwillingly'; and they both said, 'We come willingly'"ٱئْتِيَا طَوْعًا أَوْ كَرْهًا قَالَتَآ أَتَيْنَا طَآئِعِينَ.

The point of word order recorded there was this, and I bring it over here: "The offer is made with two options (ṭawʿan aw karhan), and the answer comes with one: ataynā ṭāʾiʿīn — 'we come willingly.'"

Now let us set the two verses side by side.

Fuṣṣilat 41/11al-Aḥzāb 33/72
Those addressedThe heaven and the earthThe heavens, the earth and the mountains
The verbiʾtiyā — "come" (a command)ʿaraḍnā — "We offered" (a setting before)
The optionṭawʿan aw karhan — willingly or by compulsionNo option is offered; the thing is set out
The answerataynā ṭāʾiʿīn — we came willinglyfa-abayna — they refused
The accompanying statewa ashfaqna minhā — they shrank from it
The outcomeObedienceThe burden was taken by another

What emerges from this comparison is powerful, and I record it.

The same beings give two opposite answers to two different calls.

And the difference lies in the kind of call.

In Fuṣṣilat there was a command: iʾtiyā — come. And the counterpart of a command is obedience. The answer: we came willingly.

In al-Aḥzāb there is a setting before: ʿaraḍnā — We offered. And the counterpart of a setting before is a choice. The answer: we refused.

That is, the heavens and the earth obey a command but do not take a choice.

And this is the strongest clue the verse itself gives about what the trust is. The trust is not something to be obeyed — it is something to be taken up. Complying with a command and taking on a burden are different things.

I record this as my own reading. Its ground is the choice of verb in the two verses: one iʾtiyā (a command), the other ʿaraḍnā (a setting before); one ṭāʾiʿīn (obedience), the other abayna (refusal).

The picture that emerges when the two verses are read together is this: the universe does flawlessly what is asked of it. The only thing it does not do is choose what shall be asked.

أَبَيْنَ — root أ-ب-ي

To refuse, not to accept, to decline.

And there is a note on the word: ibāʾ, according to the lexicographers, is not an ordinary refusal; it carries the sense of shrinking from a thing, keeping away from it.

The Qurʾān uses the root in several places: "Except Iblīs; he refused" (al-Baqara 2/34illā Iblīsa abā); "God will not have it otherwise than to perfect His light" (al-Tawba 9/32wa yaʾba'llāh).

And the difference between the case of Iblīs and this verse is worth recording: there ibāʾ is named together with arrogance (abā wa'stakbara). Here it is named together with shrinking (abayna wa ashfaqna).

That is, the same verb can arise from two different inward states: one arrogance, the other apprehension. And the verse ties the heavens' refusal to the second.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the accompanying verbs in the two verses.

وَأَشْفَقْنَ مِنْهَا — root ش-ف-ق

And this word is the finest point of the verse.

ش-ف-ق: a thing's being thin, growing thin. Shafaq — the thin band of sky at sunset, between day and night. Shafaqa — that which grows thin.

And from this two senses arise, and both stand together in the word:

SenseExplanation
Fear, apprehension, shrinkingDreading a thing's bad outcome
Tenderness, compassionBeing anxious lest something bad befall someone

What joins the two: growing thin. The lexicographers explain it thus: ishfāq is a state in which fear and concern are mixed at once — not pure fear, but fear mixed with care.

The Qurʾān uses the root in this twofold sense: "And they stand in awe of their Lord" (al-Anbiyāʾ 21/28min khashyatihī mushfiqūn); "They are apprehensive about the Hour" (al-Shūrā 42/18).

And the word shafaq (84/16) was treated at al-Inshiqāq; I rely on that treatment.

Now the function of the word in this verse:

The verse does not depict the refusal of the heavens and the mountains as a cowardice. The word used conveys a fine, concerned shrinking that reckons with the outcome.

That is, the refusal is not a flight; it is the result of a measuring. The weight of the burden was seen and it was understood that it could not be carried.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the "growing thin" sense of the root and its uses in the Qurʾān.

وَحَمَلَهَا ٱلْإِنسَٰنُ

The root ح-م-ل occurred in the fifty-eighth verse (iḥtamalū buhtānan) and I pointed there to this verse.

VersePatternWhat is taken upHow
58iḥtamalū (Form VIII)buhtān and ithmUnawares
72ḥamala (the bare form)al-amānaBy undertaking it

And the difference of pattern is worth noting: Form VIII generally conveys an effort and an intent; the bare form conveys the act directly. The lexicographers lay down no firm rule here; I record it but build no heavy meaning upon it.

ٱلْإِنسَٰن — root أ-ن-س (it occurred in the fifty-third verse as mustaʾnisīn) or ن-س-ي (to forget). The lexicographers divide into two and there is no settled preference.

And both derivations agree with this verse in an interesting way:

  • From أ-ن-س: man is the being that grows familiar, that draws near. The one who takes the trust is the party that draws near.
  • From ن-س-ي: man is the being that forgets. And the last word of the verse is jahūl.

I give this link as an observation; I adopt no preference for either derivation.

That the word comes with the definite article (al-insān) conveys the genus: not a particular person but man as a kind.

إِنَّهُۥ كَانَ ظَلُومًا جَهُولًا — blame or praise

The last sentence of the verse is the place most spoken about. And the debate is this: are these two adjectives a censure, or an explanation, or a praise?

Both words are in the intensive form (faʿūl):

WordRootThe plain formThe intensive form
ظَلُومظ-ل-مẓālimẓalūm — much given to wrong
جَهُولج-ه-لjāhiljahūl — much given to ignorance

The concrete sense of the root ظ-ل-م: darkness. Ẓulma — darkness; and ẓulm — to put a thing somewhere other than its place. It was treated at al-Baqara.

The root ج-ه-ل: not to know; and jahl, according to the lexicographers, conveys not only ignorance but want of measure and rashness — and this is also the sense the word jāhiliyya (which occurred in verse 33) carries.

I give the disagreement in a table. I convey it impartially and impose no preference.

ViewWhat it saysIts ground
A. CensureMan is censured for taking on a burden he cannot carry. The two intensive adjectives state a faultThat both words are used in a negative sense in the Qurʾān; the mention of punishment in verse 73
B. Explanation (not censure but cause)The adjectives explain why man was able to take the burden: he took it because he did not know the measure. This is not a reproach but an accountIts beginning with innahu — the sentence is built like a clause of ground
C. Conditional censureThe adjectives hold for the man who does not carry the trust, not for the one who carries itThat verse 73 has two poles: punishment and repentance
D. That it has a side of praiseMan's taking this burden is what separates him from the heavens and the mountains; the adjectives state the price of that courageThat the verb ḥamala does not come with a negative qualification; that the verse records man as the sole bearer

Three notes about this table:

One. I do not impose a preference. All four views are represented in classical and modern exegesis.

Two. I record two data that emerge from the wording of the verse:

  • The sentence begins with innahu kānaa pattern of ground or explanation. The verse does not say "how badly he did"; it says "because he is such".
  • And both adjectives are in the intensive form. In Arabic an intensive can convey either censure or the intensity of a quality.

Three. The seventy-third verse sets a limit to the debate: the verse enumerates two outcomes — punishment and the acceptance of repentance. That is, the outcome of taking up the trust is not one-directional.

And this is a datum of the text in favour of views C and D. I record this as an observation, not as a preference.

The place of the verse in the sūra — the logic of the close

And now the verse's link with the sūra as a whole.

In the fourth verse the sūra laid down a principle: a name does not change reality. And that principle was saying that man can do easy things with speech and must do hard things with reality.

The seventy-second verse gives that hardness its name: amāna.

And there is a link between the two verses, which I record as my own reading:

33/433/72
Whatqawlukum bi-afwāhikumal-amāna
Where it staysIn the mouthOn the back
Its costNoneThere is one
Who carries itNo oneal-insān

The sūra opens with a word that stays in the mouth and closes with a burden carried on the back.

And the seventy verses between them describe the distance between these two ends: the word given (7, 15), the word kept (23), the word broken (26), the excuse said (13), the slander said (58), the firm word (70).

I record this as my own reading; its ground is that the two verses stand at the two ends of the sūra and that both frame a matter of "carrying".

What this says to the present

One. The real contrast the verse sets up is between power and responsibility.

The verse enumerates three things: the heavens, the earth, the mountains. And all three are incomparably greater than man. But it is they who shrink from carrying the trust.

That is, the verse does not measure the power to carry by size. The trust is not a weight; it is a responsibility. And responsibility is not carried by mass.

I record this as my own reading.

Two. The measure of the word ashfaqna.

The refusal of the heavens comes not from cowardice but from measuring. And man's acceptance from not being able to measure.

This is the most honest side of the verse: man did not take this burden knowing exactly what it was. The word jahūl says this.

And its present-day form is familiar: people most often take on responsibilities without knowing their weight. On entering a work, on giving a word, on building a life. And the weight is understood afterwards.

The verse records this as a fault — but in the seventy-third verse it leaves the door open.

Three. What the comparison with Fuṣṣilat says to the present.

The universe does flawlessly what is asked of it (41/11). Man, by contrast, can choose — and precisely for that reason he can err.

And when the two verses are read together, they say something about man's position: man's distinguishing feature is not his power but his capacity to be wrong. Without choice there is no error; and without error there is no responsibility.

I record this as my own reading, and I give it not as a theological claim but as a reading that emerges from the comparison of two verses.


33/73

لِّيُعَذِّبَ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمُنَٰفِقِينَ وَٱلْمُنَٰفِقَٰتِ وَٱلْمُشْرِكِينَ وَٱلْمُشْرِكَٰتِ وَيَتُوبَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَى ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ وَٱلْمُؤْمِنَٰتِ وَكَانَ ٱللَّهُ غَفُورًا رَّحِيمًا

Li-yuʿadhdhiba'llāhu'l-munāfiqīna wa'l-munāfiqāti wa'l-mushrikīna wa'l-mushrikāti wa yatūba'llāhu ʿala'l-muʾminīna wa'l-muʾmināt, wa kāna'llāhu ghafūran raḥīmā

"This is so that God may punish the hypocrite men and the hypocrite women, the mushrik men and the mushrik women, and turn in forgiveness to the believing men and the believing women. God is Forgiving, Merciful."

The outcome of the trust

The verse is attached to the seventy-second by li- (the lām of causation): "so that…". That is, the outcome of the trust's being taken up.

And the outcome has two poles: punishment and the acceptance of repentance.

This sets a limit to the debate in the seventy-second verse, and it was recorded there: the outcome of taking up the trust is not one-directional.

Three pairs, six words

And the word order of the verse must be recorded: three groups, all with the man-woman pair.

GroupMenWomenOutcome
1al-munāfiqīnal-munāfiqātPunishment
2al-mushrikīnal-mushrikātPunishment
3al-muʾminīnal-muʾminātThe acceptance of repentance

And this closes a ring with the thirty-fifth verse of the sūra.

33/3533/73
How many pairsTenThree
What is enumeratedAttributesOutcomes
DirectionAll positiveTwo negative, one positive
The closemaghfiratan wa ajran ʿaẓīmāghafūran raḥīmā

The sūra uses the man-woman pair in four places: 35 (attributes), 36 (obligation), 58 (those injured), 73 (outcomes). All four open the extent explicitly to both sides.

I record this as a datum of the text.

The order of the outcomes

And there is a point of word order: the verse enumerates the two negative groups first and the positive group afterwards. And it ends with the acceptance of repentance.

This is a repetition of the pattern recorded at al-Fatḥ: the Qurʾān often closes its hard sections with a statement of forgiveness.

And in this sūra the same verse-ending comes for the fifth time: ghafūran raḥīmā (5, 24, 50, 59 and 73 — five times).

يَتُوبَ ٱللَّهُ عَلَى — the direction of the pattern

The root ت-و-ب: to turn. Tawba — a turning.

And the interesting side of the pattern is this: in Arabic tāba ʿala'l-ʿabd (God accepted the servant's repentance) and tāba'l-ʿabdu ila'llāh (the servant turned to God) — the same verb, and when the particle changes the direction changes.

Here the particle is ʿalā: yatūba'llāhu ʿala'l-muʾminīn — that is, the subject of the verb is God.

And this completes the word order of the verse: for two groups a verb of punishment (yuʿadhdhiba), for the third a verb of turning (yatūba). Both verbs have the same subject.

On the close of the sūra

And the last words of the sūra set up a link with its first verse.

The sūra had begun with ittaqi'llāh — a search for protection. And it ends with ghafūran raḥīmā — a statement of forgiveness.

That is, the sūra opens with the search for protection and closes with the source of protection.

I record this as my own reading; its ground is the word choices of the first and the last verse.


The sūra as a whole — looking back

Having finished the seventy-three verses, when one looks back at the sūra from the beginning it becomes visible that a text which looked scattered in fact turns around a single idea.

One. The founding principle and its four applications

The first sentence of the fourth verse — "God has not made two hearts inside any man" — is the key to reading the sūra. And the sentence that follows turns it into a ruling: dhālikum qawlukum bi-afwāhikum — this is what you say with your mouths.

The applications of the principle within the sūra:

WhereWhich sayingWhat it could not establish
4The ẓihār formulaMotherhood
4-5, 37, 40The ascription of the adopted sonLineage
13"Our houses are exposed"A legitimate excuse
12"The promise is nothing but delusion"An assessment of reality
58, 69SlanderA person's worth
67"Our masters led us astray"Escape from responsibility

In six separate places, the same structure: a saying is framed and cannot pass into reality.

And what the sūra sets against it is each time an act: to give birth (4), to ascribe to his father (5), to keep one's word (23), to give in marriage (37), to speak firmly (70), to take up a burden (72).

I record this as my own reading.

Two. The two ends of the sūra

The sūra opens with a matter of speech and closes with a matter of burden.

The opening (4)The close (72)
WhatSpeech that stays in the mouthA trust carried on the back
Its costNoneThere is one
Who can do itEveryoneThe heavens and the mountains refused

And the distance between them is the whole content of the sūra: the difference between what is easily said and what is hard to carry.

Three. What the siege section does

Nineteen verses (9-27) are given to a military event, but not a single military movement is described in the section.

What is recounted: a wind, the state of the eyes, the state of the hearts, surmises, the sentences that were said, the increase of faith, the return in rage.

And at the centre of the section stand two sentences:

VerseWhoLooking at the same scene, what they said
12The hypocrites and those with sickness in their heartsmā waʿadana'llāhu… illā ghurūrā
22The believershādhā mā waʿadana'llāhu wa rasūluh

The difference is not in the knowledge but in the conclusion drawn from the same data. This is the strongest datum of the text in the sūra and it was recorded at the twelfth verse.

Four. The word-webs in the sūra

The sūra is unusually insistent on using the same root in different places with different functions. I gather here what I recorded in separate places:

RootWhereWhat it does
د-ع-و4 (adʿiyāʾ), 5 (udʿūhum), 46 (dāʿiyan ila'llāh)The direction of the call is corrected twice
ظ-ه-ر4 (tuẓāhirūna — ẓihār), 26 (ẓāharūhum — support)The same root, two entirely different senses; what joins them is the back
و-ل-ي5 (mawālī), 6 (awlā), 15 (yuwallūna'l-adbār), 17 (waliyy)Nearness and turning the back — the two directions of the root
ق-ل-ب4, 10, 12, 26, 32, 51, 53, 66Opens with the heart and closes with the turning of the face
س-ل-م22 (taslīm), 35 (muslimīn), 44 (salām), 56 (sallimū)From a state to an attribute, from an attribute to a recompense
ص-د-ق8, 22, 23, 24, 35Truthfulness asked about, truthfulness recompensed
أ-ذ-ي48, 53 (twice), 57, 58, 59, 69Seven occurrences: every face of injury
ب-د-ل23, 52, 62Word, relationship, divine working — unchangingness on three levels
ح-م-ل58 (iḥtamalū), 72 (ḥamala)A burden taken without wanting it / a burden undertaken
ح-ر-ج37, 38, 50The removal of the same constriction, on three sides
د-ن-و28 (dunyā), 51 (adnā), 59 (yudnīna, adnā)Nearness — as time, as movement, and as ground

Five. The cognate accusative as a grammatical instrument

The sūra uses the pattern of reinforcing a verb with its verbal noun (the cognate accusative) nine times. This is a high density among the sūras of the Qurʾān.

VerseThe constructionWhat is reinforced
11zulzilū zilzālan shadīdāThe violence of the shaking
23mā baddalū tabdīlāThe absoluteness of not changing
33yuṭahhirakum taṭhīrāThe completeness of the purification
36ḍalla ḍalālan mubīnāThe plainness of the straying
38qadaran maqdūrāThe certainty of the determining
41udhkuru'llāha dhikran kathīrāThe muchness of the remembrance
56sallimū taslīmāThe completeness of the submission
61quttilū taqtīlāThe certainty of the sanction
71fāza fawzan ʿaẓīmāThe greatness of the attainment

And this choice agrees with the content of the sūra, and I record it as my own reading: from beginning to end the sūra takes as its subject the distance between speech and reality. And the cognate accusative is in Arabic the instrument for confirming a saying with its own verbal noun — it makes the sentence firm with the very act it expresses.

That is, while it recounts that speech cannot pass into reality, the sūra frames the sayings that do pass into reality with the firmest grammatical pattern.

Six. The house, the central place of the sūra

The word بيت occurs again and again in the sūra, and each time with a different face:

VerseThe house
13buyūtunā ʿawra — the house claimed to be unprotected
33qarna fī buyūtikunna — the house to be stayed in with dignity
33ahl al-bayt — the people of the house
34mā yutlā fī buyūtikunna — the house where the revelation is recited
53buyūt al-nabiyy — the house not to be entered without leave

The sūra begins at the houses of a city under siege and goes as far as the door of a prophet's house.

And the difference between the two ends is worth recording: in the thirteenth verse the house was an excuse; in the fifty-third it is a boundary. I give this as my own reading.

Seven. The sūra's seven measures for the present

One. Changing the name of a thing does not change its reality (4-5). And naming is most often a tool in the hand of the stronger; the cost is paid by the one on whom the name is fixed.

Two. An excuse has a recognisable structure (13): it rests on verifiable ground, it frees the person from choice, and it puts someone else forward.

Three. To be shaken is not to leave faith (11, 23). The measure is not whether there was a shaking; it is whether the word was changed.

Four. Exemplarity is conditional (21). An example guides the person who is already looking in a direction; in one who is not looking it produces no effect. And in the root of the word uswa there is the binding of a wound: an example is the name for saying "this is a thing that can be done".

Five. Some boundaries cannot be defended by the one they belong to (53). That a person does not say he is uncomfortable does not mean that he is not uncomfortable. The objection may not come — because objecting has a cost of its own.

Six. Setting right begins with speech (70). The root of the word sadīd is the stopper that closes a breach: firm speech is speech that leaves no gap. And a breach is later filled with something else.

Seven. Responsibility is not carried by mass (72). The heavens, the earth and the mountains are incomparably greater than man, and they shrank from carrying the trust. The power to carry is not measured by size.


Where this section does not speak with certainty

  • That verses 9-27 of the sūra came down after an event of siege is widely reported in the classical sources, and it was given in this commentary in the language of "it is transmitted". The length of the siege, the names of the parties, the numbers, the existence and the form of the entrenchment were not presented as certain knowledge, because they are not in the Qurʾān. No tribal or personal name was given. The only settlement names the Qurʾān gives are Yathrib (13, in the mouths of those calling for flight) and al-Madīna (60), and the only personal name it gives is Zayd (37).
  • On the setting of the "two hearts" sentence in 33/4 three explanations were given in a table; the third (that it was an answer to a particular saying) was conveyed with the note "it is transmitted" and was not presented as certain knowledge. No reading of the sentence as a scientific miracle was entered into; the note in Method that "no hunting for scientific miracles is done" was observed.
  • On ẓihār, reliance was placed on al-Mujādala and the detail given there was not repeated. The ruling on the preservation of the tie of lineage was conveyed; no legal detail was entered into; the differing rulings of the schools on care, inheritance and guardianship are not the subject of this commentary and no preference was adopted.
  • The classical explanations of the extent of the ruling in the word awlā at 33/6 were given in a table of four items. No legal conclusion was constructed and no preference was imposed. Nor was any ruling issued on the extent of the maternal standing of the Prophet's wives.
  • The difference of reading in lā muqāma lakum at 33/13 (muqām / maqām) was recorded and no preference was adopted.
  • The difference of reading in the verse-ending alifs at 33/10, 66 and 67 (al-ẓunūnā, al-Rasūlā, al-Sabīlā) was recorded; it was stated that it does not change the meaning.
  • On the expression qaḍā naḥbah at 33/23 two explanations were given in a table and no preference was imposed. The names mentioned in the classical sources in connection with this verse were not written.
  • Four notes were entered explicitly about 33/26-27: the verse recounts a single, historical event; the ruling is tied not to an identity but to an act (ẓāharūhum); the Qurʾān uses the same expression (ahl al-kitāb) in entirely different ways in other contexts; and al-Mumtaḥina 60/8 was cited as a boundary verse. No wholesale ruling was framed about any religion, lineage or community, and current politics was not entered.
  • The disagreement over the extent of ahl al-bayt at 33/33 was given impartially, in a table with three views and their grounds. No preference was imposed, no insinuation was made against any group, no polemic was entered. That the context before and after concerns the wives was recorded as a datum of the text; and it was recorded separately that this does not by itself settle the debate. The material of the reports was not entered into; no name, wording or source was given. It was recorded that the verse cannot be used to exalt one group or to exclude another.
  • The difference of reading in the word qarna at 33/33 (ق-ر-ر / و-ق-ر) was given in a table and no preference was adopted. No legal ruling was issued on the extent of the command (whether it is for its addressees alone or a general measure); two data of the text were recorded and it was stated that they do not settle the debate.
  • On al-jāhiliyyati'l-ūlā at 33/33 three explanations were given; the application of the third (an allusion to a second ignorance) to contemporary events was not entered into.
  • The reading of the word order at 33/35 — that the repetition itself carries information — was recorded explicitly as my own reading and its four grounds (that the inclusive masculine form was an alternative, rhythm, length, the kind of attributes) were set out. The break of symmetry in the last two pairs was given as an observation about style and no ruling was drawn from it.
  • The imputations circulating in the Isrāʾīliyyāt and story-telling literature about tukhfī fī nafsika at 33/37 were NOT ENTERED INTO. That these imputations were rejected in classical exegesis was recorded in the language of "it is transmitted", and I kept within what the wording of the verse says. Two explanations resting on the wording were given in a table and no preference was imposed. The woman's name was not given; the details of the reports about how the marriage was made and how it ended were not entered into.
  • For the question of the places in the Qurʾān where a choice of the Prophet's is corrected, reliance was placed on ʿAbasa; the list there and the note that this is an observation and not a proof were not repeated but pointed to.
  • The difference of reading khātam / khātim at 33/40 was recorded in a table; it was stated that the two readings come out at the same place and no preference was adopted. The theological debate over the extent of the construction was not entered into and no insinuation was made against any group. That the distinction between rasūl and nabī is disputed was recorded and no ruling was issued.
  • No legal ruling was issued about the expression mā malakat aymānuhum at 33/50. The Qurʾān's other notes on the same subject (the setting forward of manumission as a good deed and an expiation) were recorded without concealment; it was stated that the question has been long debated in the history of Islamic thought and goes beyond the limits of this commentary.
  • No legal ruling was issued on the extent of the min warāʾi ḥijāb regulation at 33/53 and on its present-day applications. Whether the particle min is partitive or explicative (33/59) was given as two readings and no preference was imposed.
  • What the ṣalāt at 33/56 corresponds to according to its three subjects was conveyed in a table with the classical distinction; no preference was imposed. It was recorded that the derivations offered for the concrete sense of the root ص-ل-و are not certain and no meaning was built upon them.
  • On the expression yuʾdhūna'llāh at 33/57 three explanations were given and no preference was imposed; and the note of tanzīh entered at al-Ḥadīd and at al-Baqara was preserved, with al-Shūrā 42/11 cited as the limit.
  • No legal ruling was issued about the jilbāb at 33/59. It was recorded that the descriptions the lexicographers give carry no full certainty; the ground the verse itself gives (an yuʿrafna fa-lā yuʾdhayna) was brought forward; it was stated in a table that the rulings the schools draw from this verse differ, and the note "it is not binding" was entered. Current debates and politics were not entered.
  • Four notes were entered for the sanction at 33/60-61: that the verse is conditional, that it concerns an act, that no conclusion about anyone can be drawn from it today, and that no legal ruling at all was drawn from it.
  • The application of the concept of sunnat Allāh to contemporary events was not entered into; the measure recorded at al-Fatḥ was preserved: the concept is a measure for understanding the past, not an authority for judging the present.
  • The disagreement over what the amāna is at 33/72 was given in a table with five views and their grounds, and no preference was imposed. The debate over whether the adjectives ẓalūm and jahūl are praise or censure was given impartially, with four views; two data emerging from the wording of the verse and the limit set by verse 73 were recorded as observations, not as a preference.
  • On the root of the word ٱلْإِنسَٰن (أ-ن-س / ن-س-ي) no certainty was claimed; no preference was adopted for either derivation.
  • On the link of the root fawz with mafāza (a desert) and on the link of the word aṣīl with the sense "root" no certainty was claimed; they were recorded but no meaning was built upon them.
  • The following readings are mine and were not presented as transmitted: that the fourth verse is the key to reading the sūra; that the cost of naming is paid by the one on whom the name is fixed; the transfer of authority from the mouth to the heart (4-5); that in removing one bond the sūra always establishes another (5, 6, 40); that the name al-aḥzāb names the enemy as a temporary composite; that the siege section is not military but inward; that the waʿada contrast between 12 and 22 is the spine of the section; that the two faces of shuḥḥ come from a single disposition (19); the portrait of "being far off and asking for news" (20); the weight of the root uswa in the context of the siege and why the condition of exemplarity was laid down (21); the distinction between being shaken and changing (11 and 23); that a standing is neither privilege nor burden but the increase of both at once (30-31); that the repetition at 33/35 itself carries information; that the principle and the application were set thirty verses apart (4-5 and 37); that the place where the name is written into the Qurʾān is the place where the ruling is established (37); that the seal is not a part of the text but the sign of its completion (40); the three states of the eye (10, 19, 51); that mustaʾnisīna li-ḥadīth is a fine observation for three reasons, and that some boundaries cannot be defended by the one they belong to (53); that buhtān names the offence by the state of the one wronged (58); the web of roots between murjifūn and zulzilū (11 and 60); the position of the root ق-ل-ب at the two ends of the sūra (4 and 66); that the ṭāʾiʿīn / abayna contrast between Fuṣṣilat 41/11 and 33/72 gives a clue about what the trust is; that ashfaqna depicts the refusal as the result of a measuring; that responsibility is not carried by mass; and the agreement of the density of cognate accusatives with the content of the sūra. The data of the text on which they rest (roots, patterns, particles, orders of verses, verse-endings) were shown separately each time.

48 sections

  1. al-Aḥzāb 33:1-3
  2. al-Aḥzāb 33:4
  3. al-Aḥzāb 33:5
  4. al-Aḥzāb 33:6
  5. al-Aḥzāb 33:7-8
  6. al-Aḥzāb 33:9
  7. al-Aḥzāb 33:10
  8. al-Aḥzāb 33:11
  9. al-Aḥzāb 33:12
  10. al-Aḥzāb 33:13
  11. al-Aḥzāb 33:14-15
  12. al-Aḥzāb 33:16-17
  13. al-Aḥzāb 33:18-19
  14. al-Aḥzāb 33:20
  15. al-Aḥzāb 33:21
  16. al-Aḥzāb 33:22
  17. al-Aḥzāb 33:23
  18. al-Aḥzāb 33:24
  19. al-Aḥzāb 33:25
  20. al-Aḥzāb 33:26-27
  21. al-Aḥzāb 33:28-29
  22. al-Aḥzāb 33:30-31
  23. al-Aḥzāb 33:32
  24. al-Aḥzāb 33:33
  25. al-Aḥzāb 33:34
  26. al-Aḥzāb 33:35
  27. al-Aḥzāb 33:36
  28. al-Aḥzāb 33:37
  29. al-Aḥzāb 33:38-39
  30. al-Aḥzāb 33:40
  31. al-Aḥzāb 33:41-44
  32. al-Aḥzāb 33:45-48
  33. al-Aḥzāb 33:49
  34. al-Aḥzāb 33:50
  35. al-Aḥzāb 33:51
  36. al-Aḥzāb 33:52
  37. al-Aḥzāb 33:53
  38. al-Aḥzāb 33:54-55
  39. al-Aḥzāb 33:56
  40. al-Aḥzāb 33:57-58
  41. al-Aḥzāb 33:59
  42. al-Aḥzāb 33:60-62
  43. al-Aḥzāb 33:63-64
  44. al-Aḥzāb 33:65-68
  45. al-Aḥzāb 33:69
  46. al-Aḥzāb 33:70-71
  47. al-Aḥzāb 33:72
  48. al-Aḥzāb 33:73